JP5340993B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine which can prevent the number of rights reserved and stored from being misidentified by a player when there is a possibility that a movable body is superposed on at least part of a reservation display area at the time when the movable body moves. <P>SOLUTION: When carrying out a movement performance in which shutters 38H and 38L arranged in the front of an image display device 5 are moved from a storage position where the shutters are withdrawn above and below a display screen to a front position where the shutters are superposed on a first reservation storage count display area 5D and a second reservation storage count display area 5U during the period from the start of the varying display of decoration patterns to the derivation of a final result in the image display device 5, a performance control CPU 120 moves the first reservation storage count display area 5D and the second reservation storage count display area 5U to positions where the display areas are not superposed on the shutters 38H and 38L. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2011,JPO&amp;INPIT

Description

  The present invention comprises variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the game result is determined by deriving the display result to the variable display means. The present invention relates to a gaming machine that shifts to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to a player when the game result is a specific gaming result.

  As a gaming machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. Further, a variable display unit capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) is provided, and a predetermined game value is obtained when the display result of the variable display of the identification information in the variable display unit becomes a specific display result. Are configured to give the player.

  The game value is the right that the state of the variable winning ball apparatus provided in the gaming area of the gaming machine becomes advantageous for a player who is easy to win, and the right for becoming advantageous for a player. In other words, or a condition for winning a prize ball is easily established.

In a pachinko machine, a specific display mode determined in advance is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display of a special symbol (identification information) that is started in the variable display unit based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening If this happens, a “big hit” will occur. Note that the derivation display is to stop and display a symbol (excluding stop before so-called re-variation). When the big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state where the hit ball is easy to win. And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the big prize opening, the big prize opening is closed. And the number of times the special winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be referred to as a round.

  In the variable display section, the symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) continue for a predetermined time and stop, swing, There is a possibility that a big hit will occur before the final result is displayed due to the state of scaling or deformation, or multiple symbols changing synchronously with the same symbol, or the position of the display symbol being switched An effect performed in a continuing state (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) is referred to as reach effect. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes “out of” and the variability display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  In general, this type of gaming machine stores a right to perform variable display of symbols up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) based on the fact that it has started at a predetermined start winning opening, After the end, the change display for the number of reserved storage is performed. The number of reserved memories is always displayed, for example, on a reserved display unit made up of a plurality of display units provided so as to be visible to the player, and the display mode is updated in accordance with the number of reserved stored variable displays. .

  In this type of gaming machine, the holding display unit is provided with a movable object (so-called an accessory, etc.) provided to be openable and closable, and the reserved memory number displayed on the hold display unit is concealed by the movable object. By making it impossible to confirm, there has been an attempt to give unexpectedness to the execution of variable display (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Patent Registration No. 4059170 (pages 21-22, FIG. 5)

  However, in Patent Document 1, when the holding display unit is hidden by the movable object, all the display units need only be hidden. For example, only two of the four display units are hidden. In some cases, there is a possibility that the player may misunderstand that the number of reserved memories is only two, which may cause distrust to the player.

  Therefore, the present invention prevents the player from erroneously recognizing the number of rights stored on hold when there is a possibility that at least a part of the moveable object may overlap the hold display area. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can be used.

In the gaming machine according to the present invention, the start condition is satisfied (the start winning is made at the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A. The starting winning is made at the second starting winning opening formed by the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B. Variable display means (first special symbol display device 8a, second variable display unit) for performing variable display of a plurality of types of identification information (first special symbol, second special symbol, or decorative symbol) that can be distinguished from each other. When a special symbol display 8b and an image display device 5) are provided, the result of the game is determined by deriving the display result to the variable display means, and the result of the game becomes a specific game result (for example, a big hit game result) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that shifts to a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and has the right to perform variable display of identification information based on the establishment of a start condition. Reservation storage means (first special figure reservation storage section 151A, second special figure reservation storage section 151B, special figure reservation storage section 195) for storing a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) as a limit, and predetermined display in variable display means (first hold memory number display area 5D of the image display device 5, second hold memory number display area 5U) hold display area is identifiable displays the number of stored rights reserved memory means pending identification information On-hold display control means (portion for executing the on-hold storage display control process in the effect control CPU 120) and on-hold storage means (first special figure reservation storage section 151A, second special figure reservation storage section 151B, special figure reservation storage section) identification information based on the first rights stored in 195) (first special symbol, until the variable display of the display result of the second special symbol or decorative pattern) is derived, identified game result the result of a game (e.g., Big In predetermination means (game control microcomputer 100 which determines whether the game result) Ri, and partial) executing the step S110, the non-overlapping position (storage which does not overlap the predetermined hold display area in the variable display means superimposing position that overlaps at least a portion of the hold display region in the variable display means from the position) (movable in the front position) (for example, FIG. 56 (a) (b) refer) to the movable object provided (shutter 38H, 38L) Based on the determination result of the predetermining means, the movable effect determining means (effect) for determining whether or not to execute the movable effect (opening / closing effect of the shutters 38H and 38L) for moving the movable object from the non-superimposition position In the control CPU 120, for example, a portion that executes step S510) and a movable effect based on the determination result of the movable effect determination means. Movable suggestion effect execution means for executing a motion suggestion effect that suggests the possibility of execution (the portion that executes step S538 in which the effects of FIGS. 63C and 63D are performed in the effect control CPU 120), and the movable effect When the deciding means decides to execute the movable effect, the movable effect executing means that executes the movable effect after the movement suggesting effect is executed (in the effect control CPU 120, for example, the part that executes steps S736 and S737, FIG. 59). 63), and the hold display control means displays the hold specifying information in the area where the movable object in the predetermined hold display area overlaps when the moveable effect executing means executes the moveable effect. Regardless of whether or not the movable effect is executed, the predetermined hold display area is changed to a position that does not overlap the movable object at the overlapping position (CPU for effect control). 120 pending display position change flag executes Step S921 when it is set: Figure 57, Figure 58, see FIG. 62), the movable movable demonstration execution means movable suggested demonstration execution means executes the moving suggested effect In both cases where the effect is executed and when the movable suggestion effect is executed and the movable effect is not executed , the predetermined hold display area is not superimposed on the movable object at the overlapping position from when the movable suggestion effect is executed. The position is changed (step S921 is executed when the on-screen display position change flag is set by the effect control CPU 120 : see FIGS. 59 and 63). According to such a configuration, when there is a possibility that at least a part of the hold display area overlaps when the movable object moves , the hold display area is changed to a position that does not overlap with the moveable object at the overlap position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling mistrusted without erroneously recognizing the number of rights stored on hold. In addition, when the movable suggestion effect is executed, the position of the hold display area is uniformly changed regardless of whether the move effect is executed after the move suggestion effect. It is possible to prevent a player from easily predicting the movement of an animal and reducing the interest of the game.

  The variable display means (the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the image display device 5) has a plurality of types of first identification information that can be identified based on the establishment of the first start condition. The first variable display means (first special symbol display 8a, image display device 5) for performing variable display of the above and a plurality of types of second identification information that can be identified based on the establishment of the second start condition And a second variable display means (second special symbol display 8b, image display device 5) for performing variable display, and the holding storage means can change the first identification information based on the establishment of the first start condition. Based on the first hold storage means (first special figure hold storage unit 151A, special figure hold storage unit 195) for storing the right to perform display and the establishment of the second start condition, the variable display of the second identification information is performed. Second holding storage means for storing the right to perform (second special figure holding storage unit) 51B, a special figure storage unit 195), and the storage display control means includes a first storage in a first storage display area (first storage storage number display area 5D of the image display device 5) as a storage display area. The specific information is displayed in such a manner that the number of rights stored in the first hold storage means can be specified, and the second hold display area (the first display of the image display device 5) provided at a predetermined position separate from the first hold display area. 2 on-hold storage number display area 5U), the second hold specifying information is displayed so that the number of rights stored in the second hold storage means can be specified, and the movable object (shutter 38H, 38L) is displayed in the first hold display area. And a non-overlapping position that does not overlap the second reserved display area, and is movably provided at a superimposed position that overlaps at least a part of the first reserved display area or the second reserved display area (see, for example, FIGS. 56 (a) and 56 (b)). ), Hold display control means, When the moving effect executing means executes the movable effect, the first reserved display area and the second reserved display area are changed to positions that do not overlap with the movable object at the overlapping position (the effect control CPU 120 sets the reserved display position change flag). It may be configured such that (step S921 is executed when set). According to such a configuration, even when the movable object is superimposed on one of the first reserved display area and the second reserved display area, the movable object having the first reserved display area and the second reserved display area at the overlapping position and Since the position is changed so as not to be superposed, the number of rights stored on hold is not erroneously recognized by the player, and the player can be prevented from feeling distrust.

  Variable display pattern determination for determining a variable display pattern (variation pattern) of identification information including a variable display pattern for reach in which the display state during the variable display of the identification information becomes a predetermined reach state based on the determination result of the prior determination means Variable display control means (game control microcomputer for executing variable display of identification information using the means (the part for executing step S429 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means) Reach effect executing means for executing reach effect by variable display means based on the fact that the display state during the variable display of the identification information has reached a predetermined reach state in computer 100, the part for executing steps S110-113. (For example, the normal reach shown in FIG. The holding display control means does not superimpose a predetermined holding display area on the movable object at the overlapping position when the reach effect executing means executes the reach effect. The position may be changed (see, for example, FIG. 66 in which the display positions of the first reserved memory number display area 5D and the second reserved memory number display area 5U are changed during execution of the reach effect). According to such a configuration, when the reach effect is executed by the variable display means, the movable effect can be executed in the reach effect, and even in that case, the number of reserved rights is erroneously given to the player. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful.

  Power supply monitoring means (power monitoring unit 62) for detecting a decrease in power supply voltage used in the gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1), and driving means (shutter motors 36H, 36L) for driving movable objects (shutters 38H, 38L) , Driving status detection means for detecting the driving status of the movable object (shutter sensors 37H and 37L, the portion for executing step S683 in the CPU 120 for effect control), and the right number data indicating the number of rights stored in the holding storage means Including data indicating the progress of the game including the game control memory means for storing the stored contents for at least a predetermined period even when the power supply to the game machine is stopped (in the game control microcomputer 100, step S20 is executed). The portion to be executed, the RAM 102 backed up by the backup power supply unit 61), and the power monitoring means Game control side power supply stop time processing means (game control microcomputer 100 for executing game control side power supply stop time processing for storing data indicating the game progress state in response to detection of a voltage drop. , A portion for executing a power supply stop process for storing necessary data in the backup RAM area) and a game stored in the game control storage means when power supply to the gaming machine is started Based on the data indicating the progress state of the game, the game control side recovery means (steps S41 to S43 in the game control microcomputer 100) performs a recovery process for recovering the progress state of the game when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. And when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the driving means is determined based on the detection result of the driving condition detecting means. Initial operation process execution means for executing an initial operation process (shutter position initialization process) for moving and moving a movable object to a predetermined initial position (the part for executing the shutter position initialization process in step S630 in the effect control CPU 120) The hold display control means is based on the number-of-rights data stored and held in the game control storage means after the execution of the initial operation process is completed when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. The hold specific information may be displayed (if the shutter sensors 37H and 37L are on in step S683 in the production control CPU 120, the hold display prohibition flag is reset in step S687). . According to such a configuration, when recovering from an unexpected stop of power supply, the display of the hold specific information is not restored in a state where the movable object is located at a position other than the initial position, for example, the superposition position. In addition, it is possible to suppress the player's distrust in displaying the hold specific information.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment to which the present invention is applied. It is a side view which shows the structural example of a stick controller. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows various chance eyes. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number for game counted on the main board side. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which illustrates a variation pattern classification. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit classification determination table. (A), (B) is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern classification determination table. (A), (B), (C) is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern classification determination table. (A), (B) is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number for production | presentation counted by the production | presentation control board side. (A), (B) is a figure which shows the structural example of a notice classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a display type | formula notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a display type | formula notice pattern determination table. (A), (B) is a figure which shows the structural example of the operation type | system | group notice pattern determination table. (A), (B) is a figure which shows the structural example of the operation type | system | group notice pattern determination table. (A) It is explanatory drawing which shows various production | presentation control pattern tables, (b) is a figure which shows the structural example of a hit end production | generation pattern determination table, (c) is a structural example of a stage (mode) determination table. FIG. (A) is a figure which shows the structural example of a symbol fluctuation | variation control pattern, (B) is a figure which shows the structural example of the shutter operation | movement distribution determination table at the time of a reach. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a notice effect control pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a notice effect control pattern. (A), (B) is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of an effect control pattern. FIG. 38 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of an effect control data holding area. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU in a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination process at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a shutter position initialization process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a pending | holding memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. (A) is a flowchart which shows an example of a pending | holding memory | storage display control process, (B) is a figure which shows the relationship between the memory | storage data of a special figure pending | holding memory | storage part, and the pending | holding display in a pending | holding display part. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production setting process during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a notice effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production process during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control command processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of pushbutton continuous hitting. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the waiting process per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an ending effect process. It is a schematic exploded perspective view which shows the structure of a shutter unit. (A) is an enlarged vertical sectional view showing an attachment portion between the shutter 38H and the left guide member, and (b) is an enlarged vertical sectional view showing an attachment portion between the shutter 38L and the left guide member. (A) is an enlarged vertical sectional view showing an attachment portion between the shutter 38H and the right guide member, and (b) is an enlarged vertical sectional view showing an attachment portion between the shutter 38L and the right guide member. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a state where the shutters 38H and 38L are located at the retracted position, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a state where the shutters 38H and 38L are located at the front surface position. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the shutter operation | movement from the start of variable display of a decoration design, and an end, and a hold display. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the shutter operation | movement from the start of variable display of a decoration design, and an end, and a hold display. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the shutter operation | movement from the start of variable display of a decoration design, and an end, and a hold display. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the shutter operation | movement from the start of variable display of a decoration design, and an end, and a hold display. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the shutter operation | movement from the start of variable display of a decoration design, and an end, and a hold display. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation | movement in an image display apparatus, etc. when super reach (alpha) accompanied by a display system pseudo | simulation 3 times notice is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation | movement in an image display apparatus, etc. when super reach (alpha) accompanied by the operation system pseudo | simulation 3 times notice is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus when a normal reach is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus when super reach (beta) is performed. It is a figure which shows the modification of the display operation | movement in an image display apparatus when reach is performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the allocation state of the judgment value in a loss variation pattern classification determination table (normal time).

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes). A special symbol (also referred to as “special symbol”) that is a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be displayed is variably displayed (variable display). For example, each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B variably displays a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. To do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. There is no limitation, and for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns in which the combination of the LED to be turned on and the LED to be turned off in the 7-segment LED may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols. A plurality of special symbols are assigned symbol numbers corresponding thereto. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". .

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display device 5, the first special symbol variable display by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol variable display by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game respectively correspond to the variable display. For example, in a decorative symbol display area serving as a variable display section divided into a plurality of parts such as three, decorative symbols which are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) each identifiable are variably displayed. The variable display (variable display) of the decorative design is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. In response to the start of either the first special symbol change by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol change by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special game, ”,“ Middle ”, and“ right ”decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variation of decorative symbols (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction, update display by rotation, etc.) is started. Thereafter, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 are displayed. Then, the finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas are movable within the display area of the image display device 5 so that the decorative symbols can be displayed in a reduced or enlarged manner. May be.

  As described above, in the display area of the image display device 5, a special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. In synchronization with the figure game, a plurality of types of decorative symbols that can be identified are displayed in a variable manner, and a finalized decorative symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed. In addition, for example, deriving and displaying various display symbols such as a special symbol and a decorative symbol means that identification information such as a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as a complete stop display or a final stop display) and the variable display is ended. . On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern until the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is derived and displayed, the variation speed of the decorative pattern becomes “0”, The symbol may be displayed in a stationary state, for example, in a display state that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not displayed deterministically, the player can recognize that the variation of the decorative pattern due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. The temporary stop display may include displaying the decorative symbols completely stopped for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

  In the image display device 5, as the display areas to be the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, three areas may be provided so that they can be bonded or separated, or can be bonded and separated. . The display operation in the image display device 5 is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. When the variable display of the first special figure is executed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, so that the second special symbol is displayed. When the variable display of the second special figure is executed on the display device 4B, the effect display is executed on the image display device 5 along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped. The decorative symbols variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R include, for example, eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese Numbers “1” to “8”, English letters “A” to “H”, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, characters or symbols and character images, etc. For example, it may be a decoration image showing a person, an animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a character, or any other figure. In addition to these eight types of decorative symbols, a blank symbol (a symbol that does not constitute a jackpot combination) may be included. A corresponding symbol number is assigned to each of the decorative symbols. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” are assigned to alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”, respectively. Note that the number of decorative symbols is not limited to eight, and may be any number as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a jackpot combination or a combination that is lost can be configured (for example, seven types or nine types).

  During the change of the decorative symbol, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right”, for example, from the smallest to the largest symbol number, sequentially from the top to the bottom. When the scrolling display is performed and the decorative symbol having the largest symbol number (for example, “8”) is displayed, the decorative symbol having the smallest symbol number (for example, “1”) is subsequently displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L), the symbols are scrolled from the largest symbol number to the smallest symbol symbol. When the decorative design having the smallest number is displayed, the decorative design having the largest design number may be displayed.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, a first reserved memory number display area 5D in which the first reserved memory number is displayed is formed (arranged) at the lower corner of the display area, and these first reserved memories are displayed. A second reserved memory number display area 5U in which the second reserved memory number is displayed is formed (arranged) in the upper corner of the display area that is diagonal to the number display area 5D. In the first reserved memory number display area 5D, the variable display hold number (special figure reserved memory number) corresponding to the first special figure game is displayed so as to be specified, and in the second reserved memory number display area 5U, the second special memory number display area 5D is displayed. On-hold storage display is performed to display the variable display hold number (special figure hold storage number) corresponding to the figure game so as to be specified. Here, the variable display suspension corresponding to the first special figure game or the second special figure game is the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A or the second starting formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. A winning opening is generated based on a start winning when a game ball passes (enters). That is, the start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game or a variable display of decorative symbols has been established, but a variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. Corresponding to the established start condition when the start condition for starting the variable display game is not established due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state, etc. Variable display is held.

  As an example, the first reserved memory number display area 5D and the second reserved memory number display area 5U are first started based on the occurrence of a start prize corresponding to each of the first start prize opening and the second start prize opening. A plurality of display parts whose display colors are changed are provided from left to right in order from the variable display game where the condition is satisfied. Then, in the first reserved memory number display area 5D, the start condition for the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A based on the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening. When the (first start condition) is satisfied, one of the display parts that are normally non-displayed (transparent color) (for example, the left end of the display part corresponding to the first display winning opening that is not displayed) Is changed to blue display. After that, when the start condition (first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure is established, one of the first reserved memory number display areas 5D (for example, the display part that is displayed in blue) Return the display part at the right end to non-display.

  In the first reserved memory number display area 5D and the second reserved memory number display area 5U, the number of the special figure reserved memory number is displayed by the player or the like by displaying a number indicating the special figure reserved memory number. You may make it recognizable. Further, the display colors are different in the first reserved memory number display area 5D and the second reserved memory number display area 5U, and which one of the reserved displays corresponds to which special figure reserved memory number is identified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first reserved memory number display area 5D and the second reserved memory number display area 5U may have the same display color. In this embodiment, the first reserved memory number display area 5D is provided below the display area, and the second reserved memory number display area 5U is provided above the display area. Although it is preferable because it is easy to identify whether it corresponds to the number of memories, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first reserved memory number display area 5D and the second reserved memory number display area 5U are Both may be arranged above or below the display area of the image display device 5.

  In addition to the first reserved memory number display area 5D and the second reserved memory number display area 5U, or instead of the first reserved memory number display area 5D and the second reserved memory number display area 5U, a special figure reserved memory number is used. You may make it provide the indicator to display. In the example shown in FIG. 1, in addition to the first reserved memory number display area 5D and the second reserved memory number display area 5U, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B have an upper part and a lower part. A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B are provided for displaying the figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first special figure hold memory number as the effective start winning ball number that has passed (entered) through the first start winning port formed by the normal winning ball device 6A in an identifiable manner. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second special figure hold memory number as an effective start winning ball number that has passed (entered) through the second start winning port formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B in an identifiable manner. Each of the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B has a number (for example, 4) corresponding to an upper limit value (for example, “4”) in each of the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number, for example. LED).

  Thus, although the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied, the special game started first is being executed, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. For this reason, when the start condition for starting the special figure game is not satisfied, variable display suspension corresponding to the special figure game occurs. For example, if the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is not satisfied when the first start condition is satisfied, the first special figure The number of reserved memories is incremented by 1 (incremented), and the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. In addition, when the second start condition is satisfied, if the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is not satisfied, the second special figure The reserved memory number is incremented by 1 (incremented), and execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the first special figure holding memory number is decremented by 1 (decrement), and the special figure game using the second special figure is executed. Is started, the second special figure reserved memory number is decremented by 1 (decremented).

  The variable display hold memory number obtained by adding the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number is also referred to as a total hold memory number. When simply referring to the “number of special figure hold memory”, it usually refers to a concept including any of the first special figure hold memory number, the second special figure hold memory number, and the total hold memory number. It may refer to a concept that includes the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number but excludes the total reserved memory number).

  In addition, in the display area of the image display device 5, special symbols variably displayed in a special symbol game executed by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B are separated from the decorative symbols. May be provided with a special symbol variable display area for display as identifiable. As an example, in response to the start of variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, the special symbols can be changed in the special symbol variable display area. Variation of the effect image indicating “「 ”,“ 「”, “×”, etc. corresponding to the display is started. Thereafter, in response to the fact that the special symbol variable display in the special symbol game is terminated and the confirmed special symbol is stopped, “◎” predetermined corresponding to the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol variable display area. It is only necessary to stop and display effect images such as “O” and “X”. For example, if the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game is a big hit symbol, “◎” is stopped in the special symbol variable display area, and if it is a small bonus symbol, “○” is stopped and displayed as a lost symbol. In some cases, “x” may be stopped and displayed.

  In the embodiment of the present application, the first reserved memory number display area 5D and the second reserved memory number display area 5U (these reserved memory numbers are displayed) by a movable object such as a shutter described later or an effect image (shutter image). In the case where a display device for displaying the reserved memory number is provided in place of the areas 5D and 5U, when at least a part of the display device is hidden, the first reserved memory number display area 5D and the second reserved memory number display are displayed. The position of the area 5U is changed (in the case where a display device is provided in place of the reserved storage display number display areas 5D and 5U, instead of the reserved storage display by the display device, for example, a predetermined display in the display screen of the image display device 5 is provided. The display area (display area) displays the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number).

  Below the image display device 5, an ordinary winning ball device 6A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning opening that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B has an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state that is a vertical position and an expanded open state that is a tilt position by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided to form a second start winning opening. As an example, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, so that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening. It is difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the game ball passes through the second start winning opening by the tilt control in which the movable blade piece is tilted when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the ON state ( It will be in an expanded open state that is easy to enter. In the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, although the game ball can enter the second start winning opening even in the normal open state, there is a possibility that the game ball may enter more than in the expanded open state. You may comprise so that it may become low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B may be configured such that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening in the normally open state, for example, by closing the second starting winning opening.

  A game ball that has passed (entered) a first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. A game ball that has passed (entered) a second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, a second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first special figure holding memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “ 4 ") If the following, the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port 22B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second special figure holding memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “ 4 ") If the following, the second start condition is satisfied. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. May be the same number or different numbers.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door shown in FIG. 3, and changes into an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Forming a mouth. As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the off state, the special prize opening door closes the special prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door is in the ON state, the big prize opening door opens the big winning opening. A game ball that has passed (entered) through a special winning opening formed in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is detected by, for example, a count switch 23 shown in FIG.

  Based on the detection of game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) through the large winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, the gaming ball passes through other winning openings such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, for example. More prize balls are paid out than when passing (entering). Therefore, if the special prize winning device 7 is opened in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, the first state is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the special prize winning device 7 is closed in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, the game ball cannot pass through (enter) into the special prize winning opening, and therefore, the second disadvantageous to the player. It becomes a state.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbols. Is displayed (variably displayed) in a variable manner. Such variable display of normal symbols is called a general game (also referred to as “normal game”). The normal symbol display 20 variably displays, for example, a plurality of types of normal symbols composed of numbers indicating “0” to “9”, symbols indicating “−”, and the like. A plurality of types of normal symbols are assigned symbol numbers corresponding thereto. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. The normal symbol display 20 is not limited to the one that variably displays the numbers indicating “0” to “9”, the symbols indicating “−”, and the like as normal symbols. Ordinary symbols are variably displayed by alternately lighting the decorative lamps (or LEDs) to be displayed, or by lighting a plurality of decorative lamps (or LEDs) such as “left”, “middle”, and “right” in a predetermined order. It may be a thing. Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general-purpose hold indicator 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general-purpose hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gate 41.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, one or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that a game ball that has entered one of the general prize openings is detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 is provided at the periphery of the game area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Further, between the image display device 5 and the game board 2, shutters 38 </ b> H, which are driven by shutter motors 36 </ b> H and 36 </ b> L, which will be described later, and moved up and down to open and close the front of the image display device 5. 38L is provided.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle only needs to be provided with a single shot switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping the driving of a shooting motor included in the hitting ball shooting device. At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. )) Is provided. Below the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a lower plate that holds (stores) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  A stick controller 30 that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a member that forms the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body (for example, a central portion of the lower plate). Yes. FIG. 2 shows a configuration example of the stick controller 30. The stick controller 30 includes an operation rod 30A that is held by the player. A trigger button 31A is provided at a predetermined position of the operation rod 30A (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator is hooked when the player holds the operation rod 30A). Is provided. The trigger button 31A is used for a predetermined instruction operation by performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, index finger) while the player holds the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). What is necessary is just to be comprised so that. A trigger sensor 35A (see FIG. 3) that detects a predetermined instruction operation by a push-pull operation on the trigger button 31A or the like may be built in the operation rod 30A. A tilt direction sensor unit 32 that detects a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod 30A may be provided inside the main body of the lower plate at the lower part of the stick controller 30. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit 32 includes two transmissive photosensors arranged in parallel to the board surface of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operation rod 30A when viewed from the player's side facing the pachinko gaming machine 1. 4) combining a parallel sensor pair) and two transmission photosensors (vertical sensor pair) arranged perpendicularly to the board surface of the game board 2 on the right side of the center position of the operating rod 30A when viewed from the player side. What is necessary is just to be comprised including the two transmission type photosensors. In addition, the attachment position of the stick controller 30 in a lower plate is not limited to the center part of a lower plate, The position approached to either the right or left may be sufficient.

  The member that forms the upper plate includes, for example, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 30). Is provided. The push button 31B only needs to be configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor 35 </ b> B (see FIG. 3) that detects the player's operation action performed on the push button 31 </ b> B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 31 </ b> B. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 1, the push button 31 </ b> B and the stick controller 30 are attached in the vertical position in the center portion of the upper and lower plates. On the other hand, it is good also considering the attachment position of push button 31B and the stick controller 30 as the position which moved to either the right or left in an upper plate and a lower plate, maintaining the vertical positional relationship. Alternatively, the mounting position of the push button 31B and the stick controller 30 is not in a vertical positional relationship, but may be in a horizontal positional relationship, for example.

  The trigger button 31A provided on the stick controller 30 is configured such that the player can perform an instruction operation by pushing and pulling with an operating finger while the player holds the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 with an operating hand. Yes. On the other hand, the push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 that forms the upper plate separately from the stick controller 30, and the player does not hold the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30. In FIG. 2, the instruction operation can be performed by pressing the operation hand. Therefore, the trigger button 31A is difficult to perform a continuous hitting operation that is a continuous instruction operation compared to the push button 31B.

  In the normal game by the normal symbol display 20, the normal symbol display 20 shows that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 provided in the game area is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. After the general chart start condition for executing variable display is established, based on the fact that the general chart start condition for starting variable display of normal symbols, such as the end of the previous general chart game, is established, Be started. In this normal game, after the normal symbol change is started, when a predetermined time as the normal symbol change time elapses, the fixed normal symbol that is a variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol), such as a number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “ordinary loss”. Become. Corresponding to the fact that the normal symbol variable display result is “per standard”, the expansion / release control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable tulip of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted. The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  In the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A, the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning port formed in the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first start port switch 22A shown in FIG. After the first start condition is established due to the above, it is started based on the fact that the first start condition is established, for example, due to the end of the last special game, the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. In the special game by the second special symbol display device 4B, the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning port formed in the normal variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second start port switch 22B shown in FIG. After the second start condition is satisfied due to the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, it is started based on the fact that the second special start game, the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state has ended, for example.

  In the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, after the special symbol variable display is started, the special symbol variable display result is obtained when a predetermined time as the special symbol variable time elapses. A definite special symbol (a special graph display result) is derived and displayed. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a “big hit” as a specific display result, and a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. If the special symbol different from the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the result is “lost”. After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state in which a round advantageous to the player (also referred to as “round game”) is executed a predetermined number of times. Further, after the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the game is controlled to the small hit game state different from the big hit game state.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment, as an example, the special symbol indicating the numbers “1”, “3”, and “7” is the big hit symbol, and the special symbol indicating the number “2” is the small hit symbol. The special symbol indicating the symbol “−” is a lost symbol. It should be noted that each symbol such as a big win symbol, a small bonus symbol, or a lost symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Alternatively, a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a big hit symbol, a small bonus symbol, or a lost symbol.

  Of the special symbols that show the numbers "1", "3", and "7" that will be jackpot symbols, the special symbols that show the numbers "3" and "7" will be the 15 round jackpot symbol, and the number "1" The special symbol shown will be a two-round jackpot symbol. In the big hit gaming state (15 round big hit state) as a multi-round specific game state controlled after the 15 round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the special prize winning ball door of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is controlled. However, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened by opening the large winning opening in a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) which is the first period or a period until a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls are generated. Is changed to a first state (open state) advantageous to the player. In this way, the special prize opening door that has opened the special prize opening during the round is received a special ball, which receives the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2 and then closes the special prize opening. The device 7 is changed to the second state (closed state) disadvantageous to the player, and one round is completed. In the 15 round big hit state, the number of executions of the round, which is the opening cycle of the big prize opening, becomes the first round number (for example, “15”). A game in the 15 round big hit state in which the number of round executions is “15” is also referred to as a 15-time open game. In such a 15-round big hit state, every time a game ball wins a big winning opening 60, 15 balls (prize balls) are obtained. The 15 round round big hit state is also referred to as a first specific gaming state.

  In the big hit gaming state (two round big hit state) as a small round specific gaming state controlled after the 2 round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is played in each round. The second period (for example, 0.5 seconds) in which the period for changing to the first state advantageous to the player (the period in which the grand prize opening is opened by the grand prize opening door) is shorter than the first period in the 15 round big hit state It becomes. In the 2 round big hit state, the number of executions of the round becomes a second round number (for example, “2”) smaller than the first round number in the 15 round big hit state. Note that in the 2 round big hit state, it is only necessary to control the number of executions of the round to be the second round number, and other control may be performed in the same manner as the 15 round big hit state. A game in the round two big hit state in which the number of round executions is “2” is also referred to as a two-time open game. In the two-round big hit state, in a predetermined winning ball apparatus provided separately from the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 in each round, by changing a predetermined winning opening serving as a big winning opening from a closed state to an open state, etc. The second state that is disadvantageous to the player may be changed to the first state that is advantageous to the player, and the state may be returned to the second state after a predetermined period (the first period or the second period) has elapsed.

  In such a two-round big hit state, 15 game balls (prize balls) can be obtained if a game ball wins a big winning opening, but the opening period of the big winning opening is the second period (0.5 seconds). It is very short. Therefore, the two-round big hit state is a big hit gaming state in which a ball (prize ball) cannot be obtained substantially. The 2 round big hit state is also referred to as a second specific gaming state. In addition, the big hit gaming state as the low round specific gaming state is not limited to the number of round execution times compared to the big hit gaming state as the multiple round specific gaming state. For example, the round execution number is small round specific gaming state. While the state and the multi-round specific gaming state are the same, in the small-round specific gaming state, the upper limit period (for example, 2 seconds) for opening the big prize opening is the upper limit period for the multi-round specific gaming state (for example, 29 seconds) ) May be shorter. That is, the big hit gaming state as the small round specific gaming state is that the period in which the big prize opening is changed to the open state in each round is a second period shorter than the first period in the multi-round specific gaming state, The number of executions may be at least one of the second round numbers less than the first round number in the multi-round specific gaming state.

  Further, among the special symbols indicating the numbers “3” and “7” which are the big hit symbols of 15 rounds, the special symbol indicating the number “3” is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special game 15 After the round big hit state is over, as one of the special game states, time reduction control (time reduction control) in which the variable symbol variable display time (special figure variation time) in the special figure game is shortened compared to the normal state. Controlled to short state when done. Here, the normal state is a normal game state as a game state different from a specific game state such as a big hit game state, a probability change state, and a short time state, and an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a system reset is performed). As in the case where the initialization process is performed after the power is turned on, the same control is performed. If the time-short state is terminated when any of the conditions of the special game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) and the variable display result is “big hit” is satisfied first, Good. Like the special symbol indicating the number “3”, the 15-round jackpot symbol that is controlled to the short-time state after the jackpot gaming state based on the fact that it is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game is not probable. It is called a jackpot symbol (also called “normal jackpot symbol”). Further, the fact that the non-probability variable big hit symbol out of the 15 round big hit symbols is stopped and displayed and the variable display result becomes “big hit” is called “15R non-probable big hit” (also referred to as “15R normal big hit”).

  Out of the special symbols that indicate the numbers of “3” and “7” that will be the big hit symbol of 15 rounds, the special symbol that shows the number of “7” is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game. After the status is over, or after the 2 round jackpot state has ended based on the special symbol showing the number “1” that will be the 2 round jackpot symbol being stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special game, As one of the special game states different from the normal state, for example, the probability variation state (high probability state) in which the probability variation control (probability variation control) is continuously performed together with the short time control in which the special figure variation time is shortened compared to the normal state. Be controlled. In this probabilistic state, the variable display result of each special figure game and decorative design is improved so that the probability that the variable display result will be “big hit” and further controlled to the big hit gaming state will be higher than in the normal state and the short-time state. To do. Such a probability change state continues until the next variable display result is a “big hit”, regardless of the number of executions of the special game. Like the special symbol indicating the number “7”, the 15 round jackpot symbol that is controlled to be probable after the jackpot gaming state based on being stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game is It is called a symbol. Like the special symbol indicating the number “1”, the two-round big hit symbol controlled to the probable change state after the big hit gaming state based on being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game is a sudden big hit symbol. It is called. Further, the fact that the probability variable big hit symbol of the 15 round big hit symbols is stopped and displayed and the variable display result becomes “big hit” is called “15R probability big hit”. The fact that the sudden hit symbol is stopped and displayed and the variable display result is “big hit” is referred to as “surprise big hit” (also referred to as “2R probability variable big hit”). The 15 round jackpot symbols “3” and “7” and the 2 round jackpot symbol “1” are examples, and each jackpot symbol is not limited to these. For example, in order to prevent the player from recognizing the jackpot symbol or the type of jackpot, the jackpot symbol may not be a number but may be a predetermined symbol (for example, “co”).

  After the special symbol indicating the number “2” as the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the small hit game state is controlled. In this small hit game state, similarly to the two round big hit state, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 performs a variable winning operation for changing the big winning opening to the first state (open state) advantageous to the player. That is, in the small hit gaming state, for example, the operation of setting the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state (open state) for the second period is repeatedly executed until the second number of times (the number of executions equal to the second round number) is reached. Is done. In the small hit gaming state, as in the two round big hit state, the period during which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in the first state is the second period, and the number of executions of the operation in the first state is the second. Control may be performed so that at least one of the number of times is performed. After the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state is not changed, and the game state before the variable display result becomes “small hit” is continuously controlled. However, if the number of executions of the special figure game in the special gaming state has reached a predetermined number when the special figure game with the variable display result of “small hit” is executed, after the end of the small hit gaming state, The special gaming state may end and return to the normal state. A game in the small hit gaming state in which the number of times that the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is set to the first state by the variable winning operation is “2” is also referred to as a two-time open game, similar to the game in the two round big hit state. When the winning ball device provided separately from the special variable winning ball device 7 in each round in the two round big hit state is changed to the first state, the same as the two round big hit state in the small hit gaming state. In the aspect, the winning ball apparatus may be changed to the first state.

  In the probabilistic state or the short time state, the normal symbol display unit 20 controls the normal symbol in the normal symbol game so that the variation time of the normal symbol (ordinary symbol variation time) is shorter than that in the normal state. Control for improving the probability that the display result is “per normal figure” than in the normal state, and tilt control of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the variable display result is “per normal figure”. The game ball can easily pass (enter) the second start winning opening, such as a control to make the tilt control time for performing longer than that in the normal state, and a control to increase the number of tilts than in the normal state. Control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility that the start condition is satisfied. It should be noted that any one of these controls may be performed in the probability variation state or the short time state, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. As described above, the control that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening in the probability changing state or the short-time state is also referred to as high opening control. By performing the high opening control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening becomes the expanded opening state is higher than when the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second starting condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B can be easily established, and the special figure game can be executed frequently. In addition, the time until the variable display result becomes “big hit” is shortened. Therefore, in the probability variation state and the short time state, it becomes easier to enter the big hit gaming state than in the normal state. The period during which the high opening control can be executed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to either the certain change state or the short-time state. . Further, it is also said that the gaming state is in the high base during the high opening control period. On the other hand, when it is not the high opening control period, it is said that the gaming state is in the low base. The time-short state in this embodiment is a gaming state that is also referred to as a low-probability high-base state, and the normal state is a gaming state that is also referred to as a low-probability low-base state. The latent probability changing state which is a state is a gaming state which is also referred to as a high probability low base state.

  Probability change states include not only those with time-varying control and high-opening control, but also those with time-varying control and high-opening control (latent probability changing). Also good. As an example, after the end of the 15 round big hit state based on the fact that the variable display result in the special figure game is “15R probable big hit”, the first probable state (high accuracy (Also called a high base state). After that, when the number of executions of the special figure game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times) without the special figure display result being “big hit”, the probability variation control is continuously performed, but the time reduction control or the high opening control is performed. It is also possible to control to a second certain variation state (also referred to as a high certainty low base state) that is not performed after the completion of. In addition, after the end of the two round big hit state based on the fact that the variable display result in the special game is “surprise big hit” in the normal state, the state shifts to the second probability variation state (latency probability variation state), Only the probability variation control may be performed, and the time reduction control or the high opening control may not be performed. On the other hand, after the end of the two round big hit state based on the fact that the variable display result in the special figure game is “surprise big hit” when in the probability changing state or the short time state, the state shifts to the first probability changing state, Short time control and high opening control may be performed together with the probability variation control. Alternatively, after the 15-round big hit state based on “15R probable big hit”, the control is made to the first positive change state until the special figure display result becomes “big hit” again, while the 2-round big hit state based on “surprise big hit” After the completion of, the transition to the first certain change state is made, and when the number of executions of the special figure game reaches a predetermined number without the special figure display result being “big hit”, the second certain change state is entered. It may be. While the short-time control and the high-open control are started and ended simultaneously (interlocked), the start and end of the probability variation control is not necessarily linked to the start and end of the short-time control and high-open control. May be.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and In response to the start of any of the special figure games using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B, the decorative symbol variable display (variable display) is started. Is done. The period from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the end of variable display due to the stop display of the fixed decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R Then, the variable display state of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach state. Here, the reach state means a decorative design (“reach” which is not yet temporarily stopped when the decorative design temporarily displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 forms a part of the jackpot combination. "Varying symbol") is a display state in which the variation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination is there. Specifically, in some of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R) in advance. The remaining decorative symbol display area (for example, “medium”) that has not yet been temporarily stopped when the decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol indicating the alphanumeric character “7”) constituting the determined jackpot combination is temporarily stopped is displayed. ) In the display state in which the decorative symbols are fluctuating, or all or part of the decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Is a display state that fluctuates synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination.

  Further, in response to the reach state, the variation speed of the decorative design is reduced, or a character image (an effect image simulating a person) different from the decorative design is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. Or changing the display mode of the background image, playing and displaying a moving image that is different from the decorative design, or changing the variation mode of the decorative design, performing a different rendering operation than before reaching the reach state May be. Such effect operations such as display of the character image, change of the display mode of the background image, reproduction display of the moving image, and change of the decorative pattern change mode are referred to as reach effect display (or simply reach effect). In the reach effect, not only the display operation in the image display device 5, but also the sound output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation (flashing operation) in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9, the shutters 38H and 38L, etc. It may be included that the movable object is an operation mode different from the operation mode before the reach state. As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Each reach mode has a different possibility of “big hit” (also referred to as “reliability” or “big hit reliability”). That is, it is possible to vary the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” depending on which of the multiple types of reach effects is executed. As an example, in this embodiment, reach modes such as normal reach, super reach α, and super reach β are preset. And, when the reach form of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β appears, the possibility that the variable display result will be “big hit” compared to the case where the reach form of normal reach appears (expected degree of big hit) Becomes higher.

  During the variable display of decorative designs, unlike the reach production, the decorative display variable display state may become the reach state and the variable display result may be a “hit”. There may be a case where a variable display effect for notifying the player is given by a variable display mode of the symbol or the like. In this embodiment, variable display effects such as “sliding” and “pseudo-continuous” can be executed, and each effect operation is executed in response to a change pattern being determined on the main board 11 side. Or not is determined.

  In the variable display effect of “sliding”, two or more decorative symbol display areas are displayed after changing the decorative symbols in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. After temporarily displaying the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R (for example, “left” and “right”), a predetermined number (for example, “1” or “2”) decorative symbol display area (for example, one or both of the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L and the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R), and after changing the decorative symbol again, stop display. Thus, the effect display for changing the decorative design to be stopped is performed.

  In the “pseudo-ream” variable display effect, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in response to one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special figure game being satisfied once. Before the final determined decorative symbol is derived and displayed, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The effect display in which the decorative symbols are changed again (pseudo-variable) in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R can be performed a predetermined number of times (for example, up to three times). The number of quasi-continuous fluctuations is displayed for the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, excluding the first variation after all decorative symbols are temporarily suspended after the decorative symbol variable display starts. This is the number of times that the decorative symbols re-variate in all of the areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. As an example, in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, a special combination pseudo as shown in FIG. 4A is displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. A decorative symbol that is one of a plurality of types of lost combinations predetermined as the consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is temporarily stopped and displayed. Here, the “left symbol” shown in FIG. 4A or the like is a decorative symbol temporarily displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, and the “middle symbol” is a “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C. The “right symbol” is a decorative symbol displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. In the temporary stop display, while the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol is displayed to the player by, for example, performing a fluctuation display or changing the decorative symbol again immediately after stopping for a short time. What is necessary is just to alert | report that the decoration design which is not decided. Alternatively, even in the temporary stop display, the decorative symbol may be re-fluctuated after the decorative symbol is stopped to such an extent that the player recognizes that the decorative symbol once displayed is confirmed.

  In the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, the variable display result may be set so that the possibility that the variable display result becomes “big hit” increases as the number of pseudo-continuous changes (re-changes) increases. Accordingly, the player can recognize that the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is performed by temporarily stopping display of any one of the pseudo-continuous chances GC1 to GC8, and the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations increases. Accordingly, the expectation that the variable display result becomes “big hit” is enhanced. In this embodiment, in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once by performing the pseudo-continuous change (re-change) once to three times. Based on this, it is possible to make it appear as if the variable display of the decorative symbols has been started 2 to 4 times in succession. Note that the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations (re-variations) in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect may be executed more than one to three times, for example, four or five times.

  When the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed, a related display effect, movement of movable objects such as the shutters 38H and 38L, etc. are accompanied by a plurality of variable displays (pseudo-continuous fluctuations) including the initial fluctuation. A re-variation effect may be executed. As an example, during the period of each variation display (including the first variation) by the variable display effect of “pseudo ream”, one that is lit among a plurality of decoration LEDs provided inside or outside the game area is 1 It may be controlled to increase one by one. Further, during the period of each variation display (including the first variation), the display color of the decoration LED may be controlled to change, or the lighting LED among the plurality of decoration LEDs changes. May be controlled. As another example, during the period of each variation display (including the first variation) by the variable display effect of “pseudo ream”, for movable effects such as shutters 38H and 38L, and effects provided inside or outside the game area The model (movable member) may be controlled to operate. As yet another example, the image display device 5 is controlled to display a predetermined effect image such as a specific character image during the period of each change display (including the initial change) by the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”. May be. In addition to some or all of these re-variation effects, or in place of some or all of these re-change effects, lighting and blinking of decorative LEDs, operation of the effect model, display of effect images The re-variation effect may be executed by combining some or all of them. At this time, a case where a re-variation effect combining a plurality of types of effect forms is included, or a case where a re-change effect is performed multiple times, compared to a case where a re-change effect is executed with only one type of effect form. In the case where the effect mode changes, the possibility that the variable display result becomes “big hit”, the possibility of “15R probability variable big hit”, and the like may increase.

  The production operation executed as the re-variation production may include any production operation such as sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and lighting operation of other light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9. In addition, for example, differences in the output of sound and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R, differences in the movement of the production target object (eg, production model, etc.) Depending on the movement of the character image displayed on the image display device 5 (difference in movement speed, difference in movement distance, difference in movement direction, etc.) The effect mode in the re-variation effect may be made different by changing the character display instead of the image or changing the display of the background image. Further, in addition to the re-variation effect executed during the variation of the decorative symbol, for example, when the decorative symbol that is one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is temporarily stopped, for example, audio output from the speakers 8L, 8R, The player may be able to recognize that the chance eye has been temporarily stopped and displayed by an arbitrary production operation such as the lighting operation of the light emitter such as the effect lamp 9.

  In addition to “slip” and “pseudo ream”, variable display effects using the variable display operation of such decorative patterns include, for example, “Development chance eyes”, “Development chance eyes end”, “Slip after chance eyes stop” Various production operations such as these may be executed. Here, in the variable display effect of “Development Opportunity”, “Left”, “Middle”, “Right” from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the display of the fixed decorative pattern resulting in the variable display result. In all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbols constituting the development chances included in the predetermined special combination are temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the decorative symbol variable display state is reached. A predetermined reach production is started. As a result, when the decorative symbol constituting the development opportunity is temporarily stopped, the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state, and the variable display result becomes “big hit” after the reach state is reached. Expectation is enhanced. Further, in the variable display effect of “end of development chance”, after the decorative display variable display is started, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are all displayed. Then, an effect display is performed in which a decorative pattern having a predetermined combination as an opportunity for development is derived and displayed as a confirmed decorative pattern. In the variable display effect of “slip after the chance stop”, as with the variable display effect of “pseudo ream”, after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is derived and displayed. , “Left”, “Middle”, “Right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped temporarily for the decorative combination (special combination) that is one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. After the display, unlike the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the effect display that changes the decorative symbol to be stopped by changing the decorative symbol again in a part of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Is done.

  During variable display of decorative designs, unlike reach display or variable display effects such as “slip” and “pseudo-run”, for example, displaying a predetermined effect image, displaying a message as an image, outputting sound, etc. As described above, there is a possibility that the variable display state of the decorative design may reach a reach state due to a presentation operation different from the variable display operation of the decorative design, and that the variable display result may be a “hit”. A notice effect may be executed to notify the player. The effect operation that becomes the notice effect is the variable display state of the decorative symbol after the decorative symbol variable display is started in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. May be executed (started) prior to the reach state (before the decorative symbols are temporarily displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R). In addition, the notice effect that notifies that the variable display result may be a “big hit” may include one that is executed after the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state. In this embodiment, display type advance notices such as “character display” and “step-up display” and operation type advance notices such as “single push button”, “single push button”, “single trigger button”, and “trike trigger button” are displayed. For example, a plurality of types of notice effects are set to be executable. An effect operation that becomes a notice effect may be any action that does not cause a change in the variable symbol display time (special figure change time) depending on whether or not it is executed.

  In the “character display” notice effect, during the variable display of the decorative pattern, for example, an effect display in which one of a plurality of types of character images prepared in advance is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 is performed. In the “step-up display” notice effect, during the variable display of the decorative design, for example, an effect display that switches and displays a plurality of types of effect images prepared in advance in a predetermined order in the display area of the image display device 5. An effect operation may be performed in which the effect mode changes (steps up) in a plurality of stages. In the notice effect of “step-up display”, after any one of a plurality of types of effect images prepared in advance (for example, an effect image that is displayed first in a predetermined order) is displayed, the effect image The effect display in the notice effect may be terminated without switching. In addition, instead of the effect display for switching the effect image to be displayed, or along with such an effect display, for example, the effect mode is caused by an effect operation in which a movable member for effect is operated in a plurality of types of operation modes in a predetermined order. An effect operation that changes (steps up) in a plurality of stages may be performed.

  The notice effect that can be stepped up is a special symbol or decorative symbol that is executed in response to one start prize (that one game ball has entered the first start prize slot or the second start prize slot). Is a kind of notice effect that is executed during variable display, and in particular, the aspect of the notice (display contents, effects by moving objects such as lamps, shutters 38H, 38L and movable members) changes in multiple stages (step-up) This is also referred to as a step-up notice effect. In general, the greater the number of stages (number of steps) that change, the higher the reliability (the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit”). Further, depending on the number of steps in the step-up notice effect or the effect mode at each step, it becomes “15R probability variation big hit” or “2R probability variation big hit”, a specific reach effect is executed, “15R non-probable variation” Of the promotion from “big hit” to “15R probable big hit”, at least one of them may be notified in advance. Further, the object to be notified may be changed according to the number of times of change (number of steps). For example, “reach determination” may be performed when going to the second step, “super reach confirmation” when going to the third step, and “big hit confirmation” going to the fourth step. As the change of the notice mode (step-up), different character images may be displayed in order, or the step-up may be performed by changing the shape or color of one character. May be. That is, it is only necessary to be able to recognize that the state of the notice means (display, sound, lamp, movable object, etc.) as viewed from the player changes stepwise.

  In the pre-announcement effect that becomes the operation system advance notice such as “single push button”, “single push button”, “single trigger button”, and “trigger trigger button”, a predetermined effect that is a button operation promotion effect during variable display of decorative symbols The operation may be performed. In the button operation promotion effect, for example, an effect image such as a character image or a message image prepared in advance is displayed at a predetermined position in the display area of the image display device 5 to operate the push button 31B or the trigger button 31A by the player. It is only necessary to have a directing action that prompts. The effect operation that prompts the player to perform an operation is not limited to an effect that causes the image display device 5 to display an effect image. The effect that causes a predetermined sound to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED are predetermined. The lighting pattern may be turned on or blinking, the production model provided inside or outside the game area may be operated in a predetermined operation mode, or any of these may be combined. When such a button operation promotion effect is performed, it becomes an operation effective period during which an operation action by the player is detected effectively. Then, in response to the detection of the operation action by the player within the operation effective period, for example, one of the plurality of types of effect images prepared in advance is displayed on the image display device 5, Various effect operations such as outputting sound effects corresponding to any one of the prepared voice patterns from the speakers 8L and 8R are executed.

  In the notice effect of “single push button” or “single trigger button”, a predetermined instruction operation by the player (for example, pressing operation of the push button 31B or pushing operation of the trigger button 31A) is detected once within the operation effective period. Based on this, the effect mode (effect content) in the notice effect changes. For example, when the operation is detected, the shutters 38H and 38L are operated. On the other hand, when the operation is not detected, an image shutter is displayed on the image display device 5. After that, even if an instruction operation by the player is detected, it is only necessary to perform control so that a change in the effect mode corresponding to the detection result does not occur. Alternatively, when the instruction operation by the player is detected once, the operation valid period may be ended so that the instruction operation by the player is not detected thereafter.

  In the notice effect of “push button repeated hits” or “trigger button repeat hits”, a predetermined instruction operation (for example, pressing operation of the push button 31B or pushing operation of the trigger button 31A) by the player is detected within the operation effective period. Based on the number of times and the like, the effect mode (effect content) in the notice effect changes. For example, when the operation detection is performed a predetermined number of times or more, the shutters 38 </ b> H and 38 </ b> L are rendered to operate. Further, every time an instruction operation by the player is detected, the effect mode in the notice effect is changed little by little so that the degree of change in the effect mode is changed according to the number of times the instruction operation is detected. good. Or you may make it vary the grade which an effect | action aspect changes according to the total frequency | count of instruction | indication operation detected within predetermined time.

  Also, in the notice effect of “trigger button single shot” or “trigger button repeated hit”, the effect mode (effect contents) in the notice effect changes according to the tilting operation of the stick controller 30 with respect to the operating rod 30A. For example, when a tilting operation by the player is detected, a switch display of effect images corresponding to the detected tilting direction, specifically, the displayed character moves or the character changes according to the tilting operation. By performing a switching effect such as performing an effect, the effect mode by displaying the effect image changes. Therefore, in the notice effect of “single trigger button” or “trigger trigger button repeated”, the effect manner in the notice effect changes according to the tilting operation of the stick controller 30 with respect to the operating rod 30A and the instruction operation with respect to the trigger button 31A. On the other hand, in the notice effect of “single push button” or “push button push”, the effect aspect in the notice effect changes according to the instruction operation to the push button 31B.

  An effect operation in which the effect mode changes according to the tilting operation with respect to the operating rod 30A of the stick controller 30 and an instruction operation with respect to the trigger button 31A, and an effect operation in which the effect mode changes according to the instruction operation with respect to the push button 31B are: The present invention is not limited to the notice effect, but may be executed as a reach effect or a re-change effect that is executed in response to a change pattern, for example.

  You may make it alert | report the possibility of becoming a big hit or a super reach in the 1st reserved memory number display area 5D and the 2nd reserved memory number display area 5U separately from these notice effects. In this embodiment, as will be described later, when a valid start winning occurs, a random number corresponding to the effective start winning is extracted and a lottery such as whether or not it is a big hit or super reach is performed. Based on these lottery results, changing the display format of the reserved memory display corresponding to the effective start winning prize to, for example, a star shape or a rhombus different from the normal round display may result in a big hit or super reach May be notified. Note that these notification modes are not limited to displaying different graphics, but may be notified by colors or sizes that are different from normal, or by differences in notification targets (for example, whether it is a big hit or super reach), The display form may be individually different.

  If a special symbol that will be a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special symbol game, the decorative symbol variable display state will not reach the reach state after the variable symbol variable display starts. There are cases in which a fixed decorative symbol that is a non-reach combination is stopped and displayed. Such a decorative display variable display mode is referred to as “non-reach” (also referred to as “unreach loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol that becomes a losing symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, it corresponds to the fact that the decorative symbol variable display state has reached the reach state after the decorative symbol variable display has started. Then, after the reach effect is executed, a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined reach combination (also referred to as reach lose combination) may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the decorative design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variable display result is “losing”. It should be noted that the fixed decorative pattern that is a non-reach combination and the fixed decorative pattern that is a reach combination are collectively referred to as a fixed decorative pattern of a lost combination (non-specific combination).

  When the special symbol indicating the number “3”, which is a non-probable variable jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special symbol game as a 15-round jackpot symbol, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is changed. Corresponding to the reach state, after a predetermined reach effect is executed, a definite decorative symbol that becomes a predetermined non-probable variation big hit combination (also referred to as “normal big hit combination”) is stopped and displayed. Here, the confirmed decorative symbols that are non-probable big hit combinations are, for example, symbol numbers that are variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. Among the decorative symbols “1” to “8”, any one of the decorative symbols whose symbol numbers are an even number “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” is “left”, “middle”, What is necessary is just to be able to be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In this way, the decorative symbols having the even symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” constituting the non-probable big hit combination are called non-probable symbols (also referred to as “normal symbols”). . Then, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becoming an uncertain variable big hit symbol, after the predetermined reach effect is executed, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-probable big hit combination is stopped. The variable display mode is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as jackpot type) of “non-probable change” (also referred to as “normal jackpot”) when the variable display result is “big hit”. Thus, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the variable display mode of “non-probability change”, the game is controlled to the 15 round big hit gaming state, and when the 15 round big hit state is finished, the short time state is controlled.

  When the special symbol indicating the number “7”, which is the probability variable big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special figure game as a 15-round big hit symbol, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is reached. Corresponding to the situation, after reaching the same reach effect as when the jackpot type is "non-probable change", or the reach effect different from when the jackpot type is "non-probable change" For example, after the process is executed, a fixed decorative symbol that becomes a predetermined probability variation jackpot combination may be stopped and displayed. Here, the confirmed decorative symbol that is a probable big hit combination has, for example, a symbol number variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. Among the decorative patterns of “1” to “8”, any one of the decorative patterns having the odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, “7” is “left”, “middle”, “ What is necessary is just to be able to be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In this way, the decorative symbols having odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” constituting the probability variation big hit combination are referred to as probability variation symbols. Then, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becoming a probable big hit symbol, after the reach effect is executed, the decorative display variable display mode in which the definite decorative combination of the probable big hit combination is stopped is displayed. This is referred to as a variable display mode of “probability change” (also referred to as a big hit type) when the variable display result is “big hit”.

  When the probability variable big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol in the special figure game, the fixed decorative symbol that is a non-probable variable big hit combination may be stopped and displayed as a variable display result of the decorative symbol. In this way, even when the fixed decorative symbol that is a non-probable big hit combination is stopped and displayed, if the probable big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol in the special figure game, it is included in the variable display mode of “probable change”. . Thus, after the variable display result becomes “big hit” by the variable display mode of “probability change”, it is controlled to the 15 round big hit state, and when the 15 round big hit state ends, it is controlled to the positive change state. The confirmed decorative symbol that is a non-probable big hit combination and the definite decorative symbol that is a probable big hit combination are also collectively referred to as a definitive decorative symbol of a big winning combination (specific combination).

  During the variable display of the decorative symbol in which the confirmed decorative symbol is a non-probable variation jackpot combination or a certain variation jackpot combination, a re-lottery effect may be executed as a kind of certain variation promotion effect. In the re-lottery effect, after the decorative symbols that are the non-probable big hit combinations are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5, for example, “ In the left, middle, and right decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the same decorative pattern is changed again, and the decorative pattern (probable variable pattern) that is a combination of the probabilistic big hit and non-variable is displayed. One of the decorative symbols (non-probable variable symbols) that is a probable big hit combination is stopped and displayed as a final decorative symbol (final stop display). Here, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the big hit type is “non-probable change”, as the re-lottery effect, the confirmed decoration that becomes the non-probable big hit combination after re-variation of the temporarily stopped display decorative pattern A changing promotion failure effect that derives and displays a symbol is performed. On the other hand, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the big hit type is “probable change”, as the re-lottery effect, the definite decoration that becomes the probable big hit combination after re-variation of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern The changing promotion success effect during the stop display of the symbol may be executed, or the changing promotion failure effect during the change may be executed. Such a re-lottery effect including the changing promotion failure effect and the changing promotion success effect is also referred to as a changing promotion effect.

  After the definitive decorative symbol that is a non-probable big hit combination is derived and displayed, the next round will start after one round ends in the big hit gaming state at the start of the big hit gaming state or during the round in the big hit gaming state. During the big hit, which is a notification effect on whether or not to control to the probable change state in the period until the start, the period from the end of the last round in the big hit gaming state to the start of the next variable display game, etc. A promotion effect may be executed. Note that a notification effect similar to the jackpot promotion effect may be executed during the first variable display game after the end of the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot promotion effect that is executed after the last round in the jackpot game state is particularly called “ending promotion effect”. Such a jackpot promotion effect is also a kind of probable promotion effect.

  In the jackpot promotion effect, there is no jackpot promotion success effect informing that there is a promotion in which the game state becomes a probabilistic state even though the confirmed decoration pattern is a non-probable big hit combination, and there is no promotion in a promiscuous state There is a promotion promotion failure during jackpot. For example, in the jackpot promotion effect, the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 and either the non-probable variable symbol or the probable variable symbol is stopped and displayed as the effect display result, or the decorative symbol variable display What is necessary is just to alert | report so that a player can recognize the presence or absence of the promotion which will be in a probability change state by displaying the effect image different from.

  As such fluctuating promotion effects and jackpot promotion effects, for example, one of a plurality of types of probable promotion effects such as “single push button”, “push push button”, “single trigger button”, “trigger trigger button” is selected. May be set to be executable. That is, an effect operation in which the effect mode changes according to the tilting operation with respect to the operating rod 30A of the stick controller 30 and an instruction operation with respect to the trigger button 31A, or an effect operation in which the effect mode changes according to the instruction operation with respect to the push button 31B, It may be executed as a promotion effect during change or a promotion effect during jackpot.

  As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, when a special symbol indicating the number “1” that is a two-round big hit symbol is stopped or displayed, or a special symbol indicating the number “2” that is a small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. In such a case, the variable display state of the decorative symbols does not reach the reach state. For example, a combination of a plurality of types of fixed decorative symbols predetermined as the second opening chances TC1 to TC4 as shown in FIG. One of the above may be stopped. In addition, when the special symbol indicating the number “1”, which is a two-round jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbol is changed to the reach state. Then, after a predetermined reach effect is executed, a fixed decorative symbol that becomes a predetermined reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fact that the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becomes a special symbol indicating the number of “1” which is a two-round jackpot symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbols in which various fixed ornament symbols are stopped and displayed is variable. This is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as a jackpot type) of “surprise accuracy” (also referred to as “surprising accuracy hit” or “sudden probability change big hit”) when the display result is “big hit”. Thus, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the variable display mode of “surprise accuracy”, it is controlled to the two round big hit state, and when the two round big hit state is finished, it is controlled to the probability changing state.

  When the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “accuracy”, the accuracy mode start effect may be executed during variable display of the decorative symbols. In the surprise mode start effect, a predetermined effect operation is performed in response to the big hit type being “Accuracy”. After the surprise mode start effect is performed, an effect mode different from the normal effect mode called the accuracy mode may be started. In addition, the random mode start effect is not limited to the effect operation that is executed during the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols, and continues from the variable display even during part or all of the period of the two round big hit state. An effect operation may be performed. When the suddenness mode start effect is started, the decorative symbol that is variably displayed may be erased, and after the suddenness mode start effect is executed, the confirmed decorative symbol may not be derived and displayed. In the sudden accuracy mode, for example, until the variable display result becomes “big hit” and the probability variation state ends, the effect in the sudden accuracy mode is performed. In the effect in the sudden accuracy mode, the display mode of the background image in the display area of the image display device 5 is different from the display mode in the normal rendering mode, and is output from the speakers 8L and 8R along with the variable display of the decorative pattern. The sound to be different from the sound in the normal effect mode, the lighting pattern of the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED to be different from the lighting pattern in the normal effect mode, or a part of these Alternatively, by combining all of them, it may be informed so that the player can recognize that the mode is inaccuracy.

  In the probability variation state, for example, an effect image for notifying that the probability variation state is “being probability variation” is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, or a background image or a decorative pattern display mode in the display region of the image display device 5 is displayed. May be different from the display mode in the normal effect mode, for example, so that the player can recognize that the player is in the probability change state. Alternatively, in the probability variation state, for example, the player may be unable to recognize or difficult to recognize that it is in the probability variation state by becoming the same production mode as in the normal state or the short time state (so-called latent probability variation). . It can be said that during the period in which such a latent probability change is performed, the gaming state is in the latent probability change.

  In these latent probability changes and normal states, for example, by changing the display mode of the image display device 5 to a display mode of a plurality of modes such as a day mode, a dusk mode, and a night mode, You may make it alert | report to a person. In this case, for example, when the latent probability is not changed, the day mode is easily selected and the night mode is hardly selected, and when the latent probability is changed, the day mode is hardly selected and the night mode is easily selected. The possibility of a latent probability change may be increased in the order of daytime mode, dusk mode, and night mode.

  In addition, these daytime mode, dusk mode, and night mode can be selected by, for example, lottery of “move to higher”, “do not move”, and “move to lower” every time a special game is executed. Even if it is a latent probability change, it may be changed (shifted) from the night mode to the dusk mode or the daytime mode, or may be changed (shifted) from the daytime mode to the dusk mode or the night mode.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are disposed on the back surface of the game board 2 in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 11 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and thereby the first special diagram and the second special diagram. Variable display of a predetermined display pattern such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 or controlling the variable symbol display of the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinction / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a function to control. The main board 11 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110 that receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits the detection signals to the game control microcomputer 100, and the game control microcomputer 100. A solenoid circuit 111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 81 and 82 is mounted.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R. Various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by the electrical components for rendering such as the shutter motors 36H and 36L and the game effect lamp 9 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 includes all or part of the display operation in the image display device 5 and the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, all or part of the on / off operation in the game effect lamp 9, etc., and the shutter 38H. , 38L operation, such as all or part of the operation, a function to determine the control content for causing the electrical component for production to execute a predetermined production operation is provided.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs sound from the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. For example, a processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and is turned on / off in the game effect lamp 9 and the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. A lamp driver circuit for driving is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 3, wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22 </ b> A, the second start port switch 22 </ b> B, and the count switch 23 is connected to the main board 11. The gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 have an arbitrary configuration that can detect a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor. What is necessary is just to have. In addition, the main board 11 includes a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a normal symbol display device 20, a first hold display device 25A, a second hold display device 25B, and a general drawing hold display device 25C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The main board 11 is provided with a main board side connector corresponding to, for example, the relay board 15, and an output buffer circuit is connected between the main board side connector and the game control microcomputer 100. The output buffer circuit can pass a signal only in the direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15, and prevents the signal input from the relay board 15 to the main board 11. Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 12 or the relay board 15 side to the main board 11 side.

  The relay board 15 only needs to be provided with a transmission direction regulation circuit for each wiring for transmitting a control signal from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, for example. Each transmission direction regulation circuit includes a diode having an anode connected to the main board connector corresponding to the main board 11 and a cathode connected to the presentation control board connector corresponding to the presentation control board 12, and one end connected to the cathode of the diode. And a resistor having the other end connected to the ground (GND). With this configuration, each transmission direction regulating circuit can prevent the signal from being input from the effect control board 12 to the relay board 15 and pass the signal only in the direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 12 side to the main board 11 side. In this embodiment, a transmission direction regulating circuit is provided for each wiring for transmitting a control signal in the relay board 15, and an output buffer circuit is provided between the game control microcomputer 100 and the main board side connector on the main board 11. By providing this, it is possible to prevent an illegal signal from being input to the main board 11 from the outside.

  The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used for controlling sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And a lamp control command used for controlling the lighting operation of the decoration LED and the like. FIG. 5A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. Note that the command form shown in FIG. 5A is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 5A, the command 8001H is a first change start command that specifies the start of change in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating the start of variation in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  In this embodiment, the first and second change start commands and the change pattern designation command are prepared as separate effect control commands. On the other hand, the designation content indicating which of the first special figure and the second special figure is to be changed and the designated content of the fluctuation pattern are configured to be specified by one effect control command. Also good. As an example, an effect control command in which EXT data is set corresponding to a combination of a special symbol (first special figure or second special figure) that starts change and a change pattern is prepared. You may enable it to specify the special symbol and fluctuation pattern which become a fluctuation start. Here, when the special symbol and the variation pattern that start the variation can be specified by one effect control command, the special symbol (the first special feature that starts the variation) for one variation pattern. There are cases where it is necessary to prepare two types of effect control commands according to the figure or the second special figure). On the other hand, if an effect control command for designating a special symbol for starting variation and an effect control command for designating a variation pattern are prepared separately, two types of effect control commands corresponding to the special symbol for starting variation are prepared. And the number of effect control commands corresponding to the number of types of variation patterns may be prepared, and the types of commands prepared in advance, the storage capacity of the command table, and the like can be reduced.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 5 (B), the prior determination result of whether the variable display result is “lost”, “big hit”, or “small hit”, and the variable display result is Different EXT data is set according to the big hit type determination result of whether the variable display mode (big hit type) of the decorative symbol in the case of “big hit” is “non-probable change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change” Is done. More specifically, the command 8C00H is a first variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result indicating that the variable display result is “lost”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result and a big hit type determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “non-probable change”. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result and a big hit type determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable change”. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result and a big hit type determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result notification command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “small hit”.

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern designation command and the variable display result notification command are prepared as separate presentation control commands. On the other hand, the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command and the variable display result indicated in the variable display result notification command may be configured to be specified by one effect control command. As an example, an effect in which EXT data is set corresponding to a combination of a variation pattern and a variable display result (any one of “losing”, “big hit”, “small hit”, and a big hit type in the case of “big hit”). A control command may be prepared, and information that can specify the variation pattern and the variable display result may be transmitted by the effect control command. Alternatively, the variation pattern and the variable display result may be specified by three or more effect control commands. Here, when the variation pattern and the variable display result are configured to be specified by a single effect control command, a plurality of types of effects corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display results for one variation pattern. You may need to provide control commands. On the other hand, if the production control command for designating the variation pattern and the production control command for notifying the variable display result are prepared separately, the number of production control commands corresponding to the number of types of the variation pattern and the variable display result are provided. The number of effect control commands corresponding to the number of types may be prepared, and the types of commands prepared in advance, the storage capacity of the command table, and the like can be reduced.

  The command 8F00H is a decorative symbol stop command for designating stop of variable display of decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. As will be described later, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a power failure recovery designation command when data is stored in the backup RAM when power supply to the gaming machine is started, and otherwise. Sends an initialization specification command.

  The command 94XX (H) is an effect control command (winning determination result designation command) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. In this embodiment, in the winning effect determination process (see FIG. 32), which will be described later, the game control microcomputer 100 determines which variation pattern type is to be used when starting winning. Then, a value for specifying the variation pattern type as the determination result is set in the EXT data of the determination result specifying result command at the time of winning, and control for transmission to the effect control board 12 is performed. For example, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the variation pattern type is CA1-1 to CA1-6 (non-reach deviation) at the time of starting winning at the first starting winning opening, “00 ( H) ”is set, and a winning determination result 1 designation command is transmitted. Also, for example, when it is determined that the variation pattern type is CA2-3 (becomes super-reach) at the time of starting winning at the first starting winning opening, a winning in which “01 (H)” is set in the EXT data is determined. A time determination result 2 designation command is transmitted. Also, for example, when it is determined that the variation pattern type is CA3-3 (super reach big hit) at the time of starting winning at the first starting winning opening, a winning in which “02 (H)” is set in the EXT data is determined. A time determination result 3 designation command is transmitted. For example, when it is determined that the variation pattern type is CA1-1 to CA1-6 (non-reach is lost) at the time of starting winning at the second starting winning opening, “03 (H)” is set in the EXT data. A winning determination result 4 designating command is set. Further, for example, when it is determined that the variation pattern type is CA2-3 at the start winning to the second start winning award (superreach is off), the winning is set to “04 (H)” in the EXT data. A time determination result 5 designation command is transmitted. Further, for example, when it is determined that the variation pattern type is Super CA3-3 at the start winning prize at the second start winning opening (super reach big hit), “05 (H)” is set in the EXT data. A winning determination result 6 designation command is transmitted. In addition, the value of the EXT data is set according to the determined variation pattern type, and a winning determination result designation command is transmitted.

  The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, for example, different EXT data is set corresponding to whether the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the time-short state. As a specific example, the command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to the case where the gaming state is a normal state, and the command 9501H is a highly accurate and high-speed control in which the gaming state is a probabilistic state and time-shortening control or high opening control is performed. The second gaming state designation command corresponding to the state, and the command 9502H is the third gaming state designation command corresponding to the high probability low base state (latency probability changing) in which the gaming state is the probability changing state and the time-shortening control or the high opening control is not performed. The command 9503H may be a fourth gaming state designation command corresponding to the case where the gaming state is the short-time state.

  In this embodiment, a decoration symbol stop command 8F00H is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as an effect control command for designating stop of variable display of the decoration symbol. On the other hand, the decorative symbol stop command may not be transmitted. In this case, on the side of the production control board 12, the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command is specified, and the first variation start command and the second variation start command are received. When the elapsed time reaches the specified special figure variation time, a setting for ending the effect executed corresponding to the special game is performed without receiving an effect control command from the main board 11. You can make it.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fanfare command”) that designates display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state. In the hit start designation command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result notification command is set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result or the big hit type determined result. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the corresponding relationship in the variable display result notification command.

  The command A1XXH is a big winning opening releasing notification command for notifying that the big winning opening is a period in the big winning gaming state or the small winning gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. With the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening or the notification command after the opening of the big winning opening, for example, the number of executions of rounds (for example, “1” to “15”) in the 15 round big hit state, or the big winning in the 2 round big hit state or the variable winning operation Different EXT data is set corresponding to the number of times the mouth is opened (for example, “1” or “2”). In the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, regardless of whether the big winning opening is in the open state or the big winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state, Alternatively, a continuous performance operation may be executed from the start time of the small hit game state or from the start time of variable display of the decorative symbols to the end time of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Or, in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, depending on whether the big winning opening is in the open state or the period in which the big winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state, different performance operations are performed. May be executed.

  The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. In the winning end designation command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result notification command or the winning start designation command is set, so that different EXT data is set according to the predetermined determination result or the big hit type determination result. Alternatively, in the hit end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the big hit type decision result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command or the hit start designation command. . In addition, when controlled to the two round big hit state and / or small hit game state, some or all of the hit start designation command, the big prize opening opening designation command, the big prize opening opening designation command, and the winning end designation command are all or part of Instead of being transmitted, an effect operation may be executed during the two round big hit state and / or during the small hit game state according to the fluctuation pattern indicated in the fluctuation pattern designation command.

  The command C0XXH is a special figure reserved memory number notification command for notifying the total reserved memory number that is the total value of the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number. The special figure hold memory number notification command is executed when, for example, either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, or the special start game is executed when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied. Corresponding to the start, etc., following transmission of either the first reserved memory number notification command or the second reserved memory number notification command, it is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The In the special figure hold memory number notification command, for example, the total number of hold data (for example, “0” to “8”) of the hold data in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A and the hold data in the second special figure hold storage unit 151B shown in FIG. ), Different EXT data is set. As a result, on the side of the production control board 12, when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, or when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the special game is executed. Is received, the special figure hold storage number notification command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, and the total storage of the hold data in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 151B is received. The number can be specified.

  The command C1XXH notifies the first special figure reserved memory number in order to display the special figure reserved memory number in a first reserved memory number display area 5D provided in the display area of the image display device 5 in an identifiable manner. 1 is a pending storage count notification command. The first reserved memory number notification command is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board in response to, for example, the first start condition being met or the first start condition being met and the execution of the special figure game being started. 12 is transmitted. In the first reserved memory count notification command, for example, different EXT data is set corresponding to the number of stored pending data (for example, “0” to “4”) in the first special figure reserved storage unit 151A shown in FIG. . Thereby, on the side of the production control board 12, the first transmission condition transmitted from the main board 11 when the first start condition is satisfied or when the first start condition is satisfied and the execution of the special figure game is started. By receiving a 1-hold storage number notification command and specifying the number of stored hold data in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, it is possible to grasp that there has been a valid start prize.

  The command C2XXH notifies the second special figure reserved memory number in order to display the special figure reserved memory number in a second reserved memory number display area 5U provided in the display area of the image display device 5 in an identifiable manner. 2 is a pending storage count notification command. The second reserved memory number notification command is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board in response to, for example, the second start condition being met or the second start condition being met and the execution of the special figure game being started. 12 is transmitted. In the second reserved memory count notification command, for example, different EXT data is set corresponding to the number of stored pending data (for example, “0” to “4”) in the second special figure reserved storage unit 151B shown in FIG. . Thereby, on the side of the production control board 12, the second transmission condition transmitted from the main board 11 when the second start condition is satisfied or when the second start condition is satisfied and the execution of the special figure game is started. By receiving the 2 reserved memory number notification command and specifying the number of stored data stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B, it is possible to grasp that there has been an effective start winning.

  In this embodiment, when a change (increase / decrease) occurs in the number of reserved memories, the presentation control board 12 holds the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command. Although it is possible to specify that there has been an effective start winning prize depending on whether or not the number of memories has increased, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is not determined whether or not the number of reserved memories has increased However, in order to be able to identify that there has been a valid start winning prize, in addition to the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command, the first winning prize opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is passed. In order to execute a special game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A based on the fact that the game ball that has entered (entered) is detected by the first start port switch 22A and a start winning is generated. A first starting port winning designation command (for example, command B100H) for notifying that the first starting condition is satisfied, or a game ball that has passed (entered) a second starting winning port formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is second. Notification that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is established based on the fact that the start winning is detected by the start port switch 22B. A second start opening winning designation command (command B200H) may be transmitted.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work area. A RAM (RandomAccessMemory) 102 to be provided; a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a control program by executing a game control program; a random number circuit 104 that updates numeric data indicating a random number value independently of the CPU 103; And an I / O (Input / Output port) 105. As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores the various fluctuation data. The CPU 103 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed. The one-chip microcomputer constituting the game control microcomputer 100 may include at least the RAM 103 in addition to the CPU 103, and the ROM 101 may be external or internal. Further, the random number circuit 104 and the I / O 105 may be externally attached.

  As described above, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the game control program stored in the ROM 101 to perform the game control. Specifically, this means that the CPU 103 executes control according to a program. The same applies to a microcomputer mounted on another board different from the main board 11.

  On the main board 11, for example, the random number circuit 104 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 3 counts numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. FIG. 6 is an explanatory view illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, a random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, a random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern and the random number value MR5 for determining the normal display result are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used.

  Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as game random numbers. The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data indicating all or part of these random number values MR1 to MR5. The CPU 103 uses the random counter different from the random number circuit 104 such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of MR5 may be counted. As an example, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is updated independently of the CPU 103 by the random number circuit 104, and the numerical data indicating the other random number values MR2 to MR5 is updated by the CPU 103 as a random counter. It may be updated by software using Also, by executing predetermined processing such as scramble processing and arithmetic processing using all or part of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104, numerical data indicating all or part of the random number values MR1 to MR5 is obtained. It may be updated.

  The game control microcomputer 100 may have a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 100 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 101 (an ID number assigned with a different value for each product of the game control microcomputer 100). The numerical data obtained by the setting is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 104 can be further improved.

  The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state with the variable display result of a special symbol or the like in the special figure game as “big hit”. It takes a value in the range of “1” to “65535”. The random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines the jackpot type, which is the variable display mode of the decorative symbol when the variable display result is “big hit”, as one of “non-probability change”, “probability change”, and “surprise change”. For example, a value in the range of “1” to “100”.

  The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is a random value used to determine the variation pattern type in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. For example, “1” A value in the range of “251” is taken. The random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern is a random value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. For example, “1” to “ It takes a value in the range of “997”. The random value MR5 for determining the general-purpose display result is used for determining whether the variable display result in the general-purpose game by the normal symbol display 20 is “per-normal” or “unusual for general-purpose”. For example, it takes a value in the range of “3” to “13”. That is, the random number value MR5 for determining the normal game display result is a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass (enter) through the second start winning port formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B based on the variable display result in the normal game ( This is used to determine whether or not to change from a normal open state to a state where the game ball easily passes (enters) (expanded open state).

  FIG. 7 shows a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is “losing”, the variable display mode of the decorative design is “non-reach” and “reach”, respectively. When the display result is “big hit”, when the big hit type is “non-probability change” or “probability change” or “surprise change”, or when the variable display result is “small hit” Correspondingly, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach” is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as “non-reach loss variation pattern”) and is variable. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is “losing” and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as “reach loss variation pattern”). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “lost”. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit” is referred to as a hit variation pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 7, in this embodiment, as non-reach fluctuation patterns, fluctuation patterns PA1-1 to PA1-5, fluctuation patterns PB1-1 and fluctuation patterns PB1-2 are prepared in advance. Yes. Further, as the reach variation pattern, variation pattern PA2-1, variation pattern PA2-2, variation pattern PB2-1, variation pattern PB2-2, variation pattern PA3-1, variation pattern PA3-2, variation pattern PB3-1, variation A pattern PB3-2 is prepared in advance. The hit fluctuation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probable change” include the change pattern PA4-1, change pattern PA4-2, change pattern PB4-1, change A pattern PB4-2, a fluctuation pattern PA5-1, a fluctuation pattern PA5-2, a fluctuation pattern PB5-1, and a fluctuation pattern PB5-2 are prepared in advance. As variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, or the variable display result is “small hit”, the variation patterns PC1-1 to PC1-3 are the variation patterns. Are prepared in advance. Further, a fluctuation pattern PC1-4 and a fluctuation pattern PC1-5 are prepared in advance as hit fluctuation patterns corresponding only to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”.

  FIG. 8 shows the variation pattern type in this embodiment. Each variation pattern shown in FIG. 7 is included in at least one variation pattern type among the plurality of variation pattern types shown in FIG. In other words, each variation pattern type only needs to be configured to include one or a plurality of variation patterns classified (grouped) based on, for example, an effect operation performed during variable display of decorative symbols. As an example, a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern in which a variable display state of a decorative design does not become a reach state by classifying (grouping) a plurality of variation patterns according to the type of reach effect (effect mode), and a variation with normal reach What is necessary is just to divide into the fluctuation pattern classification in which the pattern is included, and the fluctuation pattern classification in which the fluctuation pattern with a super reach (super reach α or super reach β) is included. As another example, categorizing (grouping) multiple variation patterns according to the presence or absence of “pseudo-continuous” variable display effects and the number of executions of pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) to execute “pseudo-continuous” variable display effects A variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern that is not included, a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern in which the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is 1 in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, and “pseudo-continuous” What is necessary is just to divide into the variation pattern classification in which the variation pattern which makes the frequency | count of execution of a pseudo | simulation continuous variation (revariation) 2 or more is included in the variable display effect of this. As yet another example, a plurality of variation patterns may be classified (grouped) according to the presence or absence of variable display effects such as “pseudo-continuous” and “slip”, or the variable display time of decorative symbols. Among the plurality of variation pattern types, there may be one configured to include a common variation pattern.

  In the example shown in FIG. 8, the variation pattern type CA1-1 to variation pattern type CA1-6 are prepared in advance corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”. Yes. Corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “lost” and the variable display mode is “reach”, the variation pattern types CA2-1 to CA2-3 are prepared in advance. Corresponding to the variable display result (big hit type) of “big hit” when the variable display result is “big hit”, the variable pattern type CA 3-1 to the variable pattern type CA 3-3 are prepared in advance. Corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the variable display mode (big hit type) of “surprise” or the variable display result is “small hit”, the variation pattern type CA4-1 is prepared in advance. ing. Furthermore, the variation pattern type CA4-2 is prepared in advance only in the case where the variable display result is the “big hit” and “variable display type” (big hit type).

  In the variation pattern type CA1-1, when the game state is in the low base such as the normal state, the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is not shortened, and the variable pattern such as “pseudo-ream” or “slip” is variable. The variation pattern type is “no shortening (normal state)” in which the display effect is not executed, and includes a variation pattern PA1-1 associated in advance. Fluctuation pattern type CA1-2 corresponds to the fact that the number of special figure reserved memory as the total reserved memory number is 2 to 4 when the gaming state is in the low base such as the normal state, It is a variation pattern type of “hold 2 to 4 shortened (normal state)” in which variable display time such as “pseudo ream” and “slip” is not executed because the variable display time of the decorative symbol is shortened and associated in advance Variation pattern PA1-2. The variable pattern types CA1-3 have a variable display time for special symbols and decorative symbols corresponding to the total number of reserved memories being 5 to 8 when the gaming state is in a low base such as a normal state. It is a variation pattern type of “Reservation 5-8 shortened (normal state)” in which variable display effects such as “pseudo ream” and “slip” are not executed, and a variation pattern PA1-3 associated in advance is displayed. Contains.

  In the variation pattern types CA1-4, when the gaming state is in a high base such as a short-time state, the variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols is not shortened, and variable such as “pseudo-ream” and “sliding” The variation pattern type is “no shortening (during high base)” in which the display effect is not executed, and includes a variation pattern PB1-1 associated in advance. The variable pattern type CA1-5 has a variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols corresponding to the total number of reserved memories being 2 to 8 when the gaming state is in a high base such as a short time state. It is a variation pattern type “shortened 2 to 8 (high base)” that is shortened and the variable display effect of “pseudo-ream” or “slip” is not executed, and the variation pattern PB1-2 associated in advance is Contains. The variation pattern type CA1-6 is a variation pattern type of “sliding, pseudo-continuous” in which a variable display effect of “pseudo-run” or “slip” is executed when the variable display mode is “non-reach”. The associated variation patterns PA1-4 and variation patterns PA1-5 are included.

  The variation pattern type CA2-1 is when the reach effect is ended with the normal reach that becomes the normal reach effect after the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state without executing the variable display effect of the “pseudo-ream”. Is a variation pattern type of “no normal reach (losing) pseudo-relation” for deriving and displaying a definite decorative symbol of a reach combination, and includes a variation pattern PA2-1 and a variation pattern PA2-2 that are associated in advance. In the variation pattern type CA2-2, when the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state, followed by normal reach, and when the reach effect ends, the fixed decorative symbol of the reach combination is displayed. Is a variation pattern type of “normal reach (lost) pseudo-relation” and includes a variation pattern PB2-1 and a variation pattern PB2-2 that are associated in advance. The variation pattern type CA2-3 is a super-reach (super-reach α or super-reach β) after the decorative display variable display state is set to the reach state regardless of whether or not the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed. Is a variation pattern type of “super reach (losing)” for deriving and displaying a definite decorative symbol of a reach combination when the reach production ends, and a variation pattern PA3-1 and variation pattern PA3-2 associated in advance , Fluctuation pattern PB3-1 and fluctuation pattern PB3-2.

  In the variation pattern type CA3-1, the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is not executed, and the normal display is performed after the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbol is changed to the reach state. It is a variation pattern type of “no normal reach (big hit) pseudo-relation” for deriving and displaying symbols, and includes a variation pattern PA4-1 and a variation pattern PA4-2 that are associated in advance. In the variation pattern type CA3-2, the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state, and then the normal reach is involved. Is a variation pattern type of “normal reach (big hit) pseudo-relation” and includes a variation pattern PB4-1 and a variation pattern PB4-2 that are associated in advance. The variation pattern type CA3-3 is used when the reach effect ends with the super reach after the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state regardless of whether or not the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed. Is a variation pattern type of “super reach” for deriving and displaying a definite decorative combination of jackpot combination, and previously associated variation pattern PA5-1, variation pattern PA5-2, variation pattern PB5-1, variation pattern PB5-2 is included.

  The variation pattern type CA4-1 is a variation pattern type of “2nd release chance stop” that derives and displays a definite decorative symbol that is one of the 2nd release chances TC1 to TC4. Are included in advance. In the example of the variation pattern shown in FIG. 7, the variation patterns PC1-1 to PC1-3 are variation patterns in which the confirmed decorative design is one of the two chances of opening TC1 to TC4, and the variation pattern type CA4. −1. The variation pattern type CA4-2 is a method of deriving and displaying a definite decorative pattern of reach combination after setting the variable display state of the decorative symbol to the reach state when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. It is a variation pattern type of “open reach reach loss”, and includes a variation pattern that is associated in advance with “2 times open reach loss”. In the example of the variation pattern shown in FIG. 7, the variation pattern PC1-4 and the variation pattern PC1-5 are variation patterns in which the determined decorative design is a reach combination, and are included in the variation pattern type CA4-2. .

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 3 stores various selection data and table data used for controlling the progress of the game. . For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of types of table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 11, and a variation pattern as shown in FIG. Table data constituting a variation pattern table to be stored is stored.

  FIG. 9 shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 130 stored in the ROM 101. The special figure display result determination table 130 is displayed when the first start condition for allowing the start of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied, or in the second special symbol display device 4B. When the second start condition that allows the start of the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied, before the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result (special figure display result) of the special symbol is derived and displayed, Random value for determining the special figure display result whether to control the big display game with the variable display result as “big hit” or whether to control the small display game with the variable display result as “small hit” It is a table referred to in order to make a decision based on MR1.

  In the special figure display result determination table 130, a numerical value (to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a short-time state, or a probabilistic state. (Determined value) is assigned to one of the special chart display results of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “losing”. In this embodiment, whether the game is a special game using the first special graphic in the first special symbol display device 4A or a special game using the second special graphic in the second special symbol display device 4B. Regardless, the special figure display result is determined with reference to the same special figure display result determination table 130.

  On the other hand, each of the case of the special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the case of the special game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. Correspondingly, determination tables with different allocations of determination values for special figure display results may be prepared. In this case, in the case of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A and the case of the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B, The assignment of the decision value to the special chart display result of “small hit” may be different. As an example, in the case of a special game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B, as compared to the case of the special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A, A determination value may be assigned to each special figure display result so that the ratio determined to the special figure display result of “small hit” is low.

  With such a setting, in the special figure game using the second special figure, the probability that the variable display result will be “small hit” is reduced compared to the special figure game using the first special figure. When the game ball is likely to pass (enter) through the second start winning opening with high opening control in a short time or short time state, the special figure display result is "small hit" and the little hit that hardly gets the prize ball It is possible to prevent the gaming state from being controlled, and to suppress a decrease in the gaming interests due to the delay in the game in the probability variation state or the short time state. In particular, when the special symbol game in the second special symbol display device 4B is executed in preference to the special symbol game in the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B in the probability change state or the short time state. Since the frequency of the special game in the game will be increased, the time from the probability change state or short-time state (particularly the probability change state) to the 15th round big hit state will be shortened by such setting, and the game entertainment will be reduced. The effect that can be suppressed is great. Further, in the case of the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B, a determined value is assigned so that the special figure display result of “small hit” is not determined. May be.

  FIG. 10 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table 131 stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table 131 sets the variable display mode to “hits” based on the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined (predetermined) that the special figure display result is “big hit” and controlled to the big hit gaming state. This table is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types of jackpot types such as “non-probability change”, “probability change”, and “surprise change”. In the jackpot type determination table 131, whether the value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer (fluctuation special figure designation buffer value) provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 shown in FIG. 14 is “1” or “2”. Accordingly, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type is assigned to the big hit type such as “non-probability change”, “probability change”, and “surprise change”. Here, the variable special symbol designation buffer value becomes “1” when the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is executed, and the second special symbol display device 4B has the second value. It becomes “2” when the special figure game using the special figure is executed.

  In the jackpot type determination table 131, the table data indicating the determination values assigned to a plurality of types of jackpot types is the result of determining whether to control to the 15 round jackpot state or the 2 round jackpot state, and the end of the jackpot gaming state Later, it becomes data for determination corresponding to the determination result of whether or not to control to the probability variation state. For example, the table data indicating the decision value assigned to the “non-probable change” or “probability change” jackpot type corresponds to the decision result of controlling to the 15th round jackpot state, while being assigned to the “surprise” jackpot type. The table data indicating the determined value corresponds to the determination result of controlling to the big round hit state. The table data indicating the decision value assigned to the “non-probable” jackpot type corresponds to the decision result that the control is not controlled to the probability change state, while being assigned to the jackpot type of “probability” or “surprise”. The table data indicating the determined value indicates the determination result that the control is performed in the probability variation state. The jackpot type determination table 131 is a value corresponding to the determined jackpot type (for example, any one of “0” to “2”) as a value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer 155 (a jackpot type buffer value). Table data (setting data) may be included.

  In the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 10, the allocation of the determined value to each jackpot type differs depending on whether the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1” or “2”. For example, for the jackpot type of “probability change”, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, a determined value in the range of “37” to “72” is assigned, while the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value When “2” is “2”, a determined value in the range of “37” to “100” is assigned. When the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, a decision value in the range of “73” to “100” is assigned to the “surprise” jackpot type, while the variation special figure designation buffer value is “ In the case of “2”, the decision value is not assigned.

  In the setting example shown in FIG. 10, the special figure display result is “big hit” based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied. When it is determined to control to the big hit gaming state, it is not determined to control to the two round big hit state with the big hit type as “surprise”. With this setting, when the game ball is easy to pass (enter) through the second start winning opening in the high opening control in the probability variation state or the short time state, the big hit type is “surprise” and most of the prize balls are It is possible to prevent the game from being controlled to a two-round big hit state that cannot be obtained, and to suppress a decrease in the gaming interests due to the delay in the game in the probability variation state or the short time state. In particular, when the special symbol game in the second special symbol display device 4B is executed in preference to the special symbol game in the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B in the probability change state or the short time state. Since the frequency at which the special game is executed is increased, such a setting has a great effect of suppressing the decline of the game entertainment. In addition to this setting, the special symbol game in the second special symbol display device 4B is executed in preference to the special symbol game in the first special symbol display device 4A, so that 15 rounds from the probability variation state and the short time state can be obtained. The ratio of hitting big hits can be increased to improve the gaming fun.

  Even when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, for example, a smaller decision value than that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1” is assigned to the special figure display result of “surprise”. You may be made to do. Further, when the gaming state is the short-time state, if the big hit type is “surprise” and the game shifts to the probable change state after the end of the two round big hit state, the degree of advantage for the player increases. Thus, when the gaming state is the short-time state, even if the variable special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the big hit type determination table 131 is assigned so that the determination value is assigned to the special figure display result of “surprise”. The table data may be configured.

  11 and 12 show a configuration example of the variation pattern type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. In this embodiment, as the variation pattern type determination table, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 11A, the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132B shown in FIG. 11B, and FIG. ) Loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133A shown in FIG. 12B, Loss variation pattern type determination table (high base) 133B shown in FIG. 12B, and Loss variation pattern type determination table shown in FIG. (Latency probability changing) 133C is prepared in advance.

  The jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A, when it is determined (predetermined) that the special figure display result is “big hit”, the variation pattern type is changed according to the determination result of the jackpot type. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the numerical value MR3. In the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A, a numerical value to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type depending on whether the determination result of the jackpot type is “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprising change”. (Determined value) is assigned to any one of the variation pattern type CA3-1 to variation pattern type CA3-3, variation pattern type CA4-1, and variation pattern type CA4-2. In the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A, the determined value is assigned to each variation pattern type so that the ratio determined for each variation pattern type differs depending on which of the plurality of types of jackpot types is determined. There is a part. For example, depending on whether the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probability change”, the assignment of the decision value to the variation pattern type CA3-1 to variation pattern type CA3-3 differs. Thereby, the ratio determined to the same variation pattern type can be varied according to the determination result as to which of the multiple types of jackpot types.

  Further, in the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A, there is a portion in which the determined values are assigned to different variation pattern types depending on which of the plurality of types of jackpot types is determined. For example, when the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probability change”, the decision value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA3-1 to the variation pattern type CA3-3, while the variation pattern type CA4- No determination value is assigned to 1 and the variation pattern type CA4-2. On the other hand, when the big hit type is “surprise”, the decision value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA4-1 and the variation pattern type CA4-2, while the variation pattern type CA3-1 to CA4-2. No decision value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA3-3. As a result, when the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is controlled to the 2 round big hit state according to the “surprise”, the variation pattern type different from the case of being controlled to the 15 round big hit state is determined. can do.

  When the big hit type is determined as “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change”, depending on whether the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a probability change state, or a short-time state Thus, the assignment of the decision value to each variation pattern type may be made different. Thereby, the ratio determined to the same fluctuation | variation pattern classification can be varied according to which of a plurality of types of gaming states. Also, when the big hit type is determined as “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change”, depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a probability change state, or a short-time state Thus, the determined values may be assigned to different variation pattern types. Thereby, it is possible to determine different variation pattern types depending on which of the plurality of types of gaming states.

  Depending on whether the big hit type is determined to be “non-probable change” or “probability change”, the determination value may be assigned to each variation pattern type. Thereby, the degree of expectation that the variable display result is “15R probability variation big hit” can be varied depending on which variable pattern type includes variable pattern execution. For example, when the jackpot type is “probable change”, a large number of decision values are assigned, while when the jackpot type is “non-probable change”, variable display is performed using a variation pattern included in the variation pattern type to which a small decision value is assigned. In such a case, the degree of expectation that the variable display result is “15R probability variation big hit” is increased.

  The small hit variation pattern type determination table 132B is a table that is referred to in order to determine the variation pattern type when it is determined (predetermined) that the special figure display result is “small hit”. In the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132B, all numerical values (determination values) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type are assigned to the variation pattern type CA4-1. Here, a part of the determined value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA4-1 in accordance with the case where the jackpot type is “surprise” in the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. . As described above, the variation pattern type CA4-1 is a common variation pattern type for the case where the big hit type is “surprise” and the case where the special figure display result is “small hit”. That is, the table data corresponding to the big hit type “surprise” in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A and the table data constituting the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132B include a common variation pattern type. Is set to The small hit variation pattern type determination table 132B may be set so that a determination value is assigned to a variation pattern type different from the variation pattern type that can be determined when the big hit type is “surprise”. Good. In other words, the table data corresponding to the big hit type “surprise” in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A and the table data constituting the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132B include a common variation pattern type. , Each may be set to include a unique variation pattern type.

  The loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133A, the loss variation pattern type determination table (during high base) 133B, and the loss variation pattern type determination table (latency probability variation) 133C change the special figure display result to “lost”. Then, when it is determined (predetermined), it is a table that is referred to in order to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type. Here, the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133A is selected as a use table when the gaming state is the normal state, for example. On the other hand, the loss variation pattern type determination table (in the high base) 133B is a high-accuracy and high-base state in which, for example, the gaming state is a short-time state, or the short-time control and the high-opening control are performed in the certainty-change state. When selected as a use table. The loss variation pattern type determination table (latency probability changing) 133C is selected as a use table when the time variation control or the high release control is not performed in the probability variation state (latency probability changing).

  In the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133A, the loss variation pattern type determination table (high base) 133B, and the loss variation pattern type determination table (latency probability change) 133C, the number of special figure hold memory as the total hold memory number Accordingly, the numerical values (determination values) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type are the variation pattern type CA1-1 to variation pattern type CA1-6, variation pattern type CA2-1 to variation pattern type CA2-. 3 is assigned. In the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133A, the loss variation pattern type determination table (high base) 133B, and the loss variation pattern type determination table (latency probability change) 133C, the ratios determined for each variation pattern type are mutually determined. Differently, there is a part in which a determined value is assigned to each variation pattern type. For example, when the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133A, the loss variation pattern type determination table (high base) 133B, and the loss variation pattern type determination table (latency probability variation) 133C are compared, the variation pattern types CA2-1 to CA2-1 are compared. There is a portion where assignment of the decision value to the variation pattern type CA2-3 is different. Thereby, the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type can be varied depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state, the high base, or the latent probability change.

  In the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133A, the loss variation pattern type determination table (high base) 133B, and the loss variation pattern type determination table (latency probability changing) 133C, determination values are assigned to different variation pattern types. There is a part that has been. For example, in the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133A and the variation pattern type determination table (latency probability changing) 133C, determination values are not assigned to the variation pattern types CA1-4 and CA1-5. On the other hand, determination values may be assigned to the variation pattern types CA1-1 to CA1-3 according to the number of special figure reservations stored. On the other hand, in the loss variation pattern type determination table (in the high base) 133B, the determination values are not assigned to the variation pattern types CA1-1 to CA1-3, while the variation pattern type CA1- For 4 and the variation pattern type CA1-5, a determined value may be assigned according to the number of special figure reservations stored. As a result, different variation pattern types can be determined according to whether the gaming state is the normal state, the high base, or the latent probability change.

  In this embodiment, reference is made to any one of the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133A, the loss variation pattern type determination table (high base) 133B, and the loss variation pattern type determination table (latency probability changing) 133C. Accordingly, it is possible to determine any one of the variation pattern type CA1-1 to variation pattern type CA1-6 and the variation pattern type CA2-1 to variation pattern type CA2-3. Here, as shown in FIG. 8, the variation pattern types CA1-1 to CA1-6 are variation pattern types corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “lost” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”. It is. The variation pattern types CA2-1 to CA2-3 are variation pattern types corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “reach”. Therefore, based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133A, the loss variation pattern type determination table (during high base) 133B, and the loss variation pattern type determination table (latency probability changing) By determining the variation pattern type with reference to any one of 133C, it is possible to determine whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to the reach state.

  In this embodiment, the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133A, the loss variation pattern type determination table (high base) 133B, and the loss variation pattern type determination table (latency probability change) 133C are all shown in FIG. As shown, a range of different random number MR3 is assigned to each variation pattern type according to the number of special figure hold memories, and it is possible to determine a different variation pattern type according to the increase or decrease of the number of special figure hold memories. it can.

  Specifically, when the game state is a normal state that is neither a probability change state, a time-short state nor a latent probability change state, the change time is relatively short when the number of reserved memories is “0” or “1”. Random value MR3 is assigned to a non-reach variation pattern type that does not result in a reach that includes a variation pattern such as a random number, while random time MR3 is assigned to a normal reach variation pattern type that has a longer variation time than a non-reach variation pattern. While the range is large, the allocation range of the random value MR3 for the non-reach variation pattern type increases sequentially as the number of reserved storage increases from “2” to “4” and “5” to “8”. The allocation range of the random value MR3 for the fluctuation pattern type of normal reach which is long in comparison with the fluctuation pattern of non-reach is sequentially By setting so that there is a large number of pending memories, many non-reach fluctuation patterns with relatively short fluctuation (variable constant) time are selected so that the special game is efficiently digested. On the other hand, when the number of reserved memories is small, a large number of normal reach variation patterns with relatively long variation (variable constant) time are selected, resulting in a longer period during which the special-purpose game is not performed. It has become possible to avoid that the interest of the fall.

  However, the allocation range of the random value MR3 for the variation pattern type of super reach is the same even if the number of reserved memories is different, and in this way, even if it is determined as super reach at the start winning prize. Regardless, a situation that is not determined to be super reach occurs in the special game corresponding to the start prize, or conversely, a special game that corresponds to the start prize is determined even though it is not determined to be super reach at the start prize. The situation where it is determined to be super reach in the figure game is prevented from occurring.

  In the above description, the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133A selected in the normal state has been described. As shown in FIG. 12, the same applies to the loss variation pattern type determination table (high base) 133B and the loss variation pattern type determination table (latency probability change) 133C. However, in the loss variation pattern type determination table (during high base), in the normal gaming state, the allocation content of the random value MR3 corresponding to the range of the reserved memory number “5” or more is allocated with the reserved memory number “2” or more. It is set to be able to promote the digestion of special figure game.

  Further, in the loss variation pattern type determination table (latency probability changing) 133C, as shown in FIG. 12C, the variation pattern type of reach and super reach is compared with the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133A. The assigned range of the random value MR3 is set large, and during these latent probability changes, a game that makes the player think that the latent probability is changing by generating more reach and super reach than the normal state. Sex has been granted.

  In this embodiment, the range of the number of reserved memories is, for example, three categories “0” to “1”, “2” to “4”, and “5” to “8” in the normal state. Although classified, the present invention is not limited to this, and these categories are, for example, two categories of “0” to “2”, “3” or more, and conversely, four or more categories. It is also good.

  FIG. 13 shows a configuration example of a variation pattern determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, a loss variation pattern determination table 134A shown in FIG. 13A and a hit variation pattern determination table 134B shown in FIG. 13B are prepared in advance as variation pattern determination tables.

  The loss variation pattern determination table 134A is based on the variation pattern determination random value MR4 according to the determination result of the variation pattern type, etc., when it is determined (preliminary determination) that the special figure display result is “lost”. It is a table referred to in order to determine any one of a plurality of types of variation patterns. In the loss variation pattern determination table 134A, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern according to the variation pattern type is one corresponding to the case where the special figure display result is “lost”. Or, it is assigned to a plurality of variation patterns (loss variation patterns).

  The hit variation pattern determination table 134B determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern determination disturbance is determined according to the determination result of the variation pattern type when the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit” or “small hit” (predetermined). It is a table referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on the numerical value MR4. In the winning variation pattern determination table 134B, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern according to the variation pattern type indicates that the special figure display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. Are assigned to one or a plurality of variation patterns (per variation pattern).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, the main board 11 has a signal line for inputting a power-off signal output from the power monitoring unit 62 that monitors a supply voltage or the like provided on the power supply board 16. The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 is backed up by a backup power supply supplied from a backup power supply unit 61 provided on the power supply board 16. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 is kept for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply cannot be supplied because the capacitor of the backup power supply unit 61 is discharged). Saved. In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special figure process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

  Note that only the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 is backed up by the backup power supply unit 61, and backup power is not supplied to other sub-boards such as the effect control board 12.

  Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 14 as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Yes. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 14 includes a first special figure hold storage unit 151A, a second special figure hold storage unit 151B, a general figure hold storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game A control timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155 are provided.

  The first special figure holding storage unit 151A is a special game in which a game ball wins a first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the first starting condition is satisfied but the first starting condition is not satisfied. The hold data of (a special game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A associates the reservation number with the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first start winning opening, and sets the first start condition in the passage (entrance) of the game ball. The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment is held The data is stored until the storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A in this way becomes hold storage information indicating that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is held.

  The second special figure holding storage unit 151B receives the game ball at the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B and the second start condition is satisfied, but the second start condition is not satisfied. The hold data of the game (the special game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit 151B associates with the holding number in the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting winning opening, and sets the second starting condition in the passage (entrance) of the game ball. The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment is held The data is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 151B in this way becomes hold storage information indicating that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is held.

  The general-purpose holding storage unit 151C stores the holding information of the general-purpose game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the universal figure storage unit 151C determines the common figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls in association with the reservation numbers in the order in which the game balls have passed the passing gate 41. For example, numerical data indicating the random number MR5 is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”).

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags. In this embodiment, the game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a special figure process flag, a common figure process flag, a big hit flag, a small hit flag, a probability change flag, a short time flag, and the like.

  The special figure process flag indicates the progress of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A, the progress of the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B, and the like. In step S15 of FIG. 29 executed for control and the special symbol process shown in FIG. 30, which process is to be selected and executed is instructed. The normal symbol process flag is used to select / execute processing in step S16 of FIG. 29 or the normal symbol process shown in FIG. 37 in order to control the progress of the normal symbol game using the normal symbol by the normal symbol indicator 20. Tell what to do.

  The big hit flag is set to the on state in response to a determination (predetermined) that the special figure display result is “big hit” when the special figure game is started. On the other hand, the big hit flag is cleared and turned off in response to the big hit symbol being stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game. The small hit flag is set to an on state in response to a determination (predetermined) that the special figure display result is “small hit” when the special figure game is started. On the other hand, the small hit flag is cleared and turned off in response to the small hit symbol being stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game.

  The probability change flag is set to the on state in response to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being controlled to the probability change state, and is cleared to the off state in response to the end of the probability change state. . The time reduction flag is set to the on state in response to the start of the time reduction control when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a certain change state or the time reduction state, while the time reduction control is ended. It is cleared and turned off in response to.

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers. In this embodiment, the game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with a game control process timer, a special figure variation timer, a common figure variation timer, and the like.

  The game control process timer is for measuring, for example, a time for controlling the progress of the big hit gaming state on the main board 11 side. As a specific example, the game control process timer stores, as a game control process timer value, data indicating a timer value corresponding to a time measured to control the progress of the big hit gaming state, and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the game control process timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to an elapsed time from a predetermined time, such as a start time of a big hit gaming state, and counts up periodically.

  The special figure variation timer is for measuring, on the main board 11 side, a time for controlling the progress of the special figure game such as a variable symbol display time (special figure variation time) in the special figure game. . As a specific example, the special figure variation timer stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured in order to control the progress of the special figure game as a special figure fluctuation timer value and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the special figure variation timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the elapsed time from the start time of the special figure game and periodically counts up.

  The universal variation timer is for measuring, on the main board 11 side, a time for controlling the progress of the universal diagram game such as a variable symbol display time (ordinary variation time) of the normal symbol in the ordinary game. . As a specific example, the normal fluctuation timer stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured to control the progress of the normal figure game as a normal fluctuation timer value, and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the normal time variation timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the elapsed time from the start time of the normal time game and periodically counts up.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters. In this embodiment, the game control counter setting unit 154 includes a random counter, a first start winning determination counter, a second start winning determination counter, a first reserved memory number counter, a second reserved memory number counter, and a total reserved memory number counter. , A short time counter, a round counter, etc. are provided.

  The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154 is a numerical value extracted from the random number circuit 104 or a part of numerical data indicating a random number value used for controlling the progress of the game, separately from the random number circuit 104. This is for the CPU 103 to count the data so that it can be updated by software. For example, in the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2 to MR5 is stored as random count values. The numerical data indicating the numerical value is updated. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

  The first start winning determination counter counts the number of times that it has been determined that the signal state in the first start winning signal that is the detection signal of the game ball transmitted from the first start port switch 22A is ON. belongs to. For example, each time it is determined that the signal state in the first start winning signal from the first start port switch 22A is ON, the stored value in the first start winning determination counter is incremented by one. When the stored value in the first start winning determination counter reaches a predetermined winning determination value, the game ball that has normally entered the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is detected. Judgment is made. In addition, the stored value in the first start winning determination counter is cleared when it is determined that the signal state in the first start winning signal is OFF or when it is determined that the winning determination value has been reached. It may be initialized to “0”.

  The second start winning determination counter counts the number of times that it has been determined that the signal state in the second start winning signal that is the detection signal of the game ball transmitted from the second start port switch 22B is ON. belongs to. For example, each time it is determined that the signal state in the second start winning signal from the second start port switch 22B is ON, the stored value in the second start winning determination counter is incremented by one. When the stored value in the second start winning determination counter reaches a predetermined winning determination value, the game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is normally detected. Is made. In addition, the stored value in the second start winning determination counter is cleared when the signal state in the second start winning signal is determined to be off, or when it is determined that the winning determination value has been reached. It may be initialized to “0”.

  The first reserved memory number counter is for counting the first reserved memory number that is the number of reserved data in the first special figure reserved memory unit 151A. For example, in the first reserved memory number counter, count value data corresponding to the first reserved memory number is stored as the first reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1) Addition or 1 subtraction). The second reserved memory number counter is for counting the second reserved memory number that is the number of reserved data in the second special figure reserved memory unit 151B. For example, in the second reserved memory number counter, count value data corresponding to the second reserved memory number is stored as the second reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1) Addition or 1 subtraction). The total reserved memory number counter is for counting the total reserved memory number obtained by adding up the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. For example, count value data corresponding to the total reserved memory number is stored in the total reserved memory number counter as a total reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1 addition or 1 subtraction) in accordance with the increase or decrease in the total reserved memory number )

  The time reduction counter counts the number of remaining special-purpose games that can be executed before the completion of the time reduction control in the high base when the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probable change state or a time reduction state. belongs to. For example, when the jackpot gaming state is ended, data indicating the count initial value “100” corresponding to the jackpot type buffer value being “0” is set as the hourly count count value in the hourly number counter. . Thereafter, until the variable display result becomes “big hit”, the time count count value is subtracted by 1 every time the special game is finished. Then, when the time reduction count value reaches “0”, the time reduction control is terminated and the control to shift from the high base to the low base is performed by clearing the time reduction flag and turning it off. .

  The round number counter is for counting the number of round games executed in the big hit gaming state. For example, in the round number counter, data indicating a count initial value “1” at the start of the big hit gaming state is set as the round number count value. When one round game is finished and the next round game is started, the round count value is incremented by 1 and updated.

  The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers. In this embodiment, the game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with a transmission command buffer, a start port buffer, a variation special figure designation buffer, a big hit type buffer, and the like.

  The transmission command buffer is used to temporarily store setting data for transmitting a control command from the main board 11 to the sub-side control board. For example, the transmission command buffer includes a plurality of buffer areas (for example, “12”), and setting data indicating storage addresses in the ROM 101 of the command table corresponding to the control command to be transmitted is stored in each buffer area. The In addition, a buffer area where setting data is written and read in the transmission command buffer may be specified by a transmission command pointer or the like, and a plurality of buffer areas may be used as a ring buffer.

  The starting port buffer stores a buffer value indicating whether a game ball that has entered the first starting winning port or the second starting winning port is detected. As an example, “1” is set in the start port buffer value in response to the normal detection of a game ball that has entered the first start winning port by the first start port switch 22A. Further, “2” is set to the start port buffer value in response to the normal detection of the game ball that has entered the second start winning port by the second start port switch 22B.

  The variable special symbol designation buffer includes a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. A buffer value indicating whether the special figure game is executed is stored. As an example, “1” is set in the variable special figure designation buffer value in response to the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. Further, in response to the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B, “2” is set to the variable special figure designation buffer value. Then, in response to the end of the special figure game, the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “0”.

  The big hit type buffer stores a buffer value corresponding to a determination result in which the big hit type is one of a plurality of types when the variable display result is “big hit”. For example, based on the setting in the jackpot type determination table 131 as shown in FIG. If there is, the jackpot type buffer value is set to “1”, and if the jackpot type is “surprise”, the jackpot type buffer value is set to “2”.

  The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 3 has an input port for receiving various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100, and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area for the effect control CPU 120. Random number for updating numerical data indicating random numbers independently of the RAM 122, the display control unit 123 for executing processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, and the effect control CPU 120 A circuit 124 and an I / O 125 are mounted. As an example, in the effect control board 12, when the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect control program read from the ROM 121, a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes the various data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores the data, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect data in the RAM 122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the reception control CPU 120 for receiving the input of various signals from the outside of the presentation control board 12 via the I / O 125, and the presentation control CPU 120 for I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12. Alternatively, while the production control CPU 120 is built in the production control microcomputer, at least one of the ROM 121 and the RAM 122 may be externally attached to the production control microcomputer. The random number circuit 124 may be any one that is built in or externally attached to the production control microcomputer. In the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 5, wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 13, Wiring for transmitting an electrical decoration signal as an information signal indicating lamp data is connected to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, on the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action for the trigger button 31A has been detected from the trigger sensor 35A, and the player for the push button 31B. As an information signal indicating that an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action has been detected is detected as a player's operation action for the wiring for transmitting from the push sensor 35B, the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30. Wiring for transmitting the operation detection signal is also connected from the tilt direction sensor unit 32.

  Further, the effect control board 12 is provided with wiring for outputting a drive signal to the shutter motors 36H and 36L for operating the shutters 38H and 38L, and the front surface of the image display device 5 where the shutters 38H and 38L are at predetermined initial positions. Wires for transmitting detection signals from the shutter sensors 37H and 37L for detecting that the storage position is not covered are connected.

  In this embodiment, the shutters 38H and 38L are provided with shutter motors 36H and 36L and shutter sensors 37H and 37L, respectively, so that the shutter 38H provided on the upper side of the image display device 5; The shutter 38L provided on the lower side of the image display device 5 can be individually operated independently.

  On the effect control board 12, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation so as to be updatable. The random number used for controlling such a production operation is also called a production random number. FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the side of the effect control board 12. As shown in FIG. 15, in this embodiment, on the side of the production control board 12, the random number value SR1-1 for determining the display system notice type, the random value SR1-2 for determining the operation type notice type, and the display system notice are displayed. Random value SR2-1 for determining a pattern, random value SR2-2 for determining an operation system advance notice pattern, random value SR3 for determining a winning end (ending) effect, random value SR4 for determining a stage (mode) type, pending notice Numerical data indicating each of the random number values SR5 for determination is controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a production effect, random numbers other than these may be used. For example, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the final stop symbol used for determining a final decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that becomes a variable display result of the decorative symbol may be controlled to be countable.

  The random value SR1-1 for determining the display system notice type determines whether or not to execute the notice effect by displaying a predetermined effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, and the notice when it is decided to execute it. It is a random value used to determine the type as any of a plurality of types prepared in advance. The random number SR1-2 for determining the operation system notice type determines whether or not to execute the notice effect by the effect operation according to a predetermined instruction operation on the stick controller 30 (including the operation stick 30A and the trigger button 31A) and the push button 31B. This is a random value used for determining one of a plurality of types prepared in advance as a notice type when it is determined to execute. As an example, the random number value SR1-1 for determining the display system notice type takes a value in the range of “1” to “377”, and the random value SR1-2 for determining the operation type notice type is “1” to “491”. Takes a value in the range.

  When the random number SR2-1 for determining the display system notice pattern is determined to be one of the display system notice types, a plurality of display system notice patterns that are notice patterns corresponding to the contents of the effect operation that becomes the notice effect are provided. A random value used to determine one of the types. When the random number SR2-2 for determining the operation system notice pattern is determined as one of the operation system notice types, a plurality of operation system notice patterns that are notice patterns corresponding to the contents of the effect operation that becomes the notice effect are provided. A random value used to determine one of the types. As an example, the random number value SR2-1 for determining the display system notice pattern takes a value in the range of “1” to “643”, and the random value SR2-2 for determining the operation system notice pattern is “1” to “779”. Takes a value in the range.

  The random value SR3 for determining the end of hitting (ending) effect is an effect that operates the shutters 38H and 38L in the end of hitting (ending) effect, or is based on the shutter image without operating the shutters 38H and 38L. It is a random value used to determine whether or not to produce. As an example, the random value SR3 for determining the end of winning (ending) effect takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”.

  The random number SR4 for determining the stage (mode) type is determined as one of a plurality of stages (modes) such as a daytime mode, a dusk mode, and a night mode, and from these stages (modes) to another stage (mode). It is a random value used to determine whether or not to change (transfer). As an example, the stage (mode) type determination random value SR4 takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”.

  The random value SR5 for determining the holding notice determines that the holding notice is to be implemented when the variation pattern determined when there is a valid start winning in the winning effect determination process is a non-reach variation pattern. It is a random number to do (so-called). As an example, random number value SR5 for holding notice determination takes a value in the range of “1” to “10”.

  Note that the range of values that each random value takes is shown as an example, and can be set to an arbitrary range.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 3 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, and control pattern tables prepared for the production control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and controls.

  FIG. 16 shows a configuration example of the notice type determination table stored in the ROM 121. In this embodiment, as the notice type determination table, a display type notice type determination table 140A shown in FIG. 16A and an operation type notice type determination table 140B shown in FIG. 16B are prepared in advance. . The display type notice type determination table 140A determines whether or not to execute the notice type effect of the display type notice type by displaying a predetermined effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, and the display type notice type when it is executed. Is a table that is referred to in order to determine which of a plurality of types is based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the display system notice type. The operation type advance notice type determination table 140B determines whether or not to execute a notice effect of the operation type advance notice type according to a predetermined instruction operation on the stick controller 30 or the push button 31B, and a plurality of operation type advance notice types in the case of execution. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine which type is selected based on the random number SR1-2 for determining the operation type notice type.

  In the display system advance notice type determination table 140A, the display system is selected as one of the display system advance notice types of no character display CAY1 and step-up display CAY2 according to the change pattern designated by the change pattern designation command. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number SR1-1 for determining the notice type is assigned. Here, the display type notice type of the character display CAY1 is a notice type in which an effect display for displaying a character image in the display area of the image display device 5 is performed as an effect operation included in the notice effect of “character display”. It is. The display system notice type of the step-up display CAY2 is an effect that enables a plurality of kinds of effect images to be displayed in a predetermined order in the display area of the image display device 5 as an effect operation included in the notice effect of “step-up display”. This is a notice type to be displayed.

  In the operation type advance notice type determination table 140B, there is no operation type advance notice or a push button is issued according to the first special figure hold memory number or the second special figure hold memory number or the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command. A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number SR1-2 for determining the operation system advance notice type is assigned to any of the operation system advance notice types of CBY1, push button continuous hit CBY2, trigger button single shot CBY3, and trigger button continuous hit CBY4. ing. Here, the operation type advance notice type of the push button single CBY1 is that the player performs the instruction operation of the push button 31B once within the operation valid period as the effect operation included in the notice effect of “single push button”. Accordingly, it is a notice type in which the effect mode (effect content) changes due to the effect image switching display or the like. The operation type advance notice type of the push button continuous hit CBY2 is the number of times the player has instructed to operate the push button 31B within the operation valid period (for example, the total number of times or per unit time) The notice mode changes depending on the effect image switching display according to the number of operations and the operation interval. The operation type advance notice type of the trigger button single CBY3 is that the player performs an instruction operation of the trigger button 31A once within the operation valid period as an effect operation included in the notice effect of “single trigger button” or the stick controller 30. In accordance with the tilting operation of the operating rod 30A, the effect type changes depending on the effect image switching display. The operation type notice type of the trigger button repeated hit CBY4 is the number of times the trigger button 31A is instructed and operated within the operation valid period (for example, the total number of times or the number of times of operation per unit time) as the effect operation included in the notice effect of the “trigger button repeated hit” , The operation interval, etc.) and the effect type change depending on the effect image switching display in response to the tilting operation of the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30.

  In the setting example of the operation type advance notice type determination table 140B shown in FIG. 16B, the variable display result such as the fluctuation pattern PA1-1, the fluctuation pattern PA1-4, or the fluctuation pattern PA1-5 is “lost” and the variable display mode is changed. Even in the case of a variation pattern that becomes “non-reach”, it may be determined as an operation type notice type other than that without an operation type notice. On the other hand, in the case of a variation pattern in which the decorative symbol variable display state does not reach the reach state, it may be set so that it is not determined as an operation system advance notice type other than no operation system advance notice. In general, in the case of a variation pattern in which the decorative symbol variable display state does not reach the reach state, there are many cases where the special symbol or the decorative symbol variable display time is short, and by the notice effect using the stick controller 30 or the push button 31B. It is difficult to enhance the production effect. In addition, even if the notice effect using the stick controller 30 or the push button 31B is executed, if the variable display state of the decorative pattern does not reach the reach state, the player is greatly discouraged and the gaming interest is reduced. Invite. In view of this, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of such a problem by setting so that the notice effect that is the operation system notice is not executed when the reach state is not reached.

  Further, in the setting example of the operation system notice type determination table 140B shown in FIG. 16B, as shown in the push button single-use CBY1 and trigger button single-use CBY3, the random number SR1-2 for determining the operation system notice type at the time of disconnection. The number of assigned determination values is substantially the same, but the number of assigned decision values for the random number SR1-2 at the time of hit is much larger for the trigger button single CBY3 than for the push button single CBY1. With this setting, there is a higher possibility that the operation notice effect by the trigger button 31A will be a big hit than the push button 31B, and when the operation notice effect is disclosed, the operation target is pushed. By selecting the button 31B or trigger button 31A (display of black and white reversed display), the operation is displayed. Subject and it is capable to provide to the player the expectation that it might than can be a big hit a higher trigger button 31A.

  17 and 18 show a configuration example of a display system notice pattern determination table stored in the ROM 121. FIG. In this embodiment, as a display system notice pattern determination table, a display system notice pattern determination table 141A shown in FIG. 17 and a display system notice pattern determination table 141B shown in FIG. 18 are prepared in advance. When the display type advance notice pattern determination table 141A is determined as the display type advance notice type of the character display CAY1, the display type advance notice pattern is selected from any one of a plurality of types based on the random number SR2-1 for determining the display type advance notice pattern. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine. When the display system notice pattern determination table 141B is determined as the display system notice type of the step-up display CAY2, the display system notice pattern is selected from a plurality of kinds of display system notice patterns based on the random number SR2-1 for determining the display system notice pattern. It is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not.

  In the display system notice pattern determination table 141A, one of the display system notice pattern YAP1-1 to the display system notice pattern YAP1-9 is used for determining the display system notice pattern according to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value SR2-1 is assigned. Then, in the display system notice pattern determination table 141A, when the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is not executed, any one of the display system notice pattern YAP1-1 to the display system notice pattern YAP1-4 is determined. Is assigned. On the other hand, in the case of the variation pattern for executing the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, the determined value is assigned to any of the display system notice pattern YAP1-1 to the display system notice pattern YAP1-4. Absent. Accordingly, the display system notice pattern YAP1-1 to display system notice pattern YAP1-4 execute the notice effect in a predetermined effect form when the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is not executed. The display system notice pattern YAP1-5 to the display system notice pattern YAP1-9 execute the notice effect in a predetermined effect mode corresponding to the number of executions (total number of times) of the pseudo continuous change in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect. It is supposed to be.

  In the display system notice pattern YAP1-1 to display system notice pattern YAP1-4, for example, the type and number of characters displayed as effect images are different, and the display mode of effect images indicating the same character (for example, the color of clothes of characters) Etc.), or a combination of these, or by changing the display mode of other characters, the player has different reliability in the notice display effect of “character display”. It only needs to be recognized. In addition, it is not limited to what makes the production | presentation aspect which a player can recognize easily, You may suggest that reliability differs by making the display aspect difficult for a player to recognize. The reliability of the notice effect may be the possibility that the variable display state of the decorative symbol will reach the reach state, the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit”, or the variable display result may be “ The possibility that the big hit type in the case of “big hit” becomes “probable change” may be used. In the display system announcement pattern YAP1-5 to the display system announcement pattern YAP1-9, the display system announcement pattern YAP1-1 to display system announcement pattern YAP1-4 is notified in accordance with each of the initial fluctuation and the pseudo continuous fluctuation. It is only necessary to set so that the display of the effect image indicating the same character as the effect or a different character is performed.

  In the display system advance notice pattern determination table 141B, the display system advance notice pattern is determined as one of the display system advance notice pattern YAP2-1 to the display system advance notice pattern YAP2-9 according to the change pattern designated by the change pattern designation command. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value SR2-1 is assigned. Then, in the display system notice pattern determination table 141B, when the variable pattern effect does not execute the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, the display system notice pattern YAP2-1 to the display system notice pattern YAP2-4 is determined. Is assigned. On the other hand, in the case of the variation pattern for executing the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, the determined value is assigned to any of the display system notice pattern YAP2-1 to the display system notice pattern YAP2-4. Absent. Accordingly, the display system notice pattern YAP2-1 to the display system notice pattern YAP2-4 execute the notice effect in a predetermined effect form when the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is not executed. The display system notice pattern YAP2-5 to the display system notice pattern YAP2-9 execute the notice effect in a predetermined effect form corresponding to the number of executions (total number of times) of the quasi-continuous variation in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect. It is supposed to be.

  In the display system notice pattern YAP2-1 to the display system notice pattern YAP2-4, for example, the number of steps in which the effect image is switched and displayed is changed, or the display mode of the outer frame of the effect image (for example, the frame pattern and display color) Etc.), different whether or not to display a predetermined effect image in the first step as the first stage, or a combination of some or all of these, or other step-up display It is only necessary to allow the player to recognize that the reliability of the “step-up display” in the notice effect is different by changing the arbitrary display mode in. In the display system notice pattern YAP2-5 to the display system notice pattern YAP2-9, the notice by any of the display system notice pattern YAP2-1 to the display system notice pattern YAP2-4 corresponding to each of the initial fluctuation and the pseudo continuous fluctuation. It is only necessary to set so that the same step-up display as the effect or a different step-up display is performed.

  The display system notice pattern may include a pattern that does not perform the notice effect that becomes the display system notice in a part of the initial fluctuation and the pseudo series fluctuation due to the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect. However, the reliability of the notice effect that is executed in response to the change display after the execution of the pseudo continuous change (after the re-change) is the advance notice that is executed in response to the previous change display (initial change or pseudo continuous change). It may be more than the reliability of the production. In addition, when a notice effect that becomes a display system notice is once performed in either the initial fluctuation or the pseudo-continuous fluctuation, a notice effect that becomes a display system notice is performed corresponding to all the pseudo-series fluctuations thereafter. Set as follows. As a result, when the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, the expectation that the variable display result becomes “big hit” as the number of pseudo-variable increases increases, but the reliability of the notice effect is increased. It is possible to prevent a decrease in game entertainment due to a decrease in the degree and interruption of the notice effect.

  19 and 20 show a configuration example of an operation system notice pattern determination table stored in the ROM 121. FIG. In this embodiment, as the operation system notice pattern determination table, the operation system notice pattern determination table 142A shown in FIG. 19A, the operation system notice pattern determination table 142B shown in FIG. 19B, and FIG. ) And an operation system notice pattern determination table 142D shown in FIG. 20B are prepared in advance. The operation system notice pattern determination table 142A is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types of operation system notice patterns when the operation system notice type of the push button single CBY1 is decided. The operation system advance notice pattern determination table 142B is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types of operation system advance notice patterns when the operation system advance notice type of the push button continuous hit CBY2 is determined. The operation system notice pattern determination table 142C is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of operation system notice patterns when the operation system notice pattern of the trigger button single CBY3 is determined. The operation system advance notice pattern determination table 142D is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types of operation system advance notice patterns when the operation system advance notice type of the trigger button repeated hit CBY4 is determined.

  In the operation system warning pattern determination table 142A, one of the operation system warning pattern YBP1-1 to the operation system warning pattern YBP1-8 is used for determining the operation system warning pattern according to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value SR2-2 is assigned. Then, in the operation system advance notice pattern determination table 142A, when the variation pattern does not execute the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, the determined values are assigned to the operation system advance notice pattern YBP1-1 and the operation system advance notice pattern YBP1-2. ing. On the other hand, in the case of the variation pattern for executing the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, the determined value is assigned to both the operation system advance notice pattern YBP1-1 and the operation system advance notice pattern YBP1-2. Absent. Therefore, the operation system advance notice pattern YBP1-1 and the operation system advance notice pattern YBP1-2 are used to execute the "push button single shot" advance notice corresponding to the case where the "pseudo-continuous" variable display effect is not executed. It is. The operation system advance notice pattern YBP1-3 to the operation system advance notice pattern YBP1-8 provide a "push button single shot" advance notice effect corresponding to the number of executions (total number of times) of the pseudo continuous change in the "pseudo continuous" variable display effect. It is for execution.

  In the operation system advance notice pattern determination table 142B, an operation system advance notice pattern determination is made to one of the operation system advance notice patterns YBP2-1 to YBP2-8 according to the change pattern designated by the change pattern designation command. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value SR2-2 is assigned. In the operation system advance notice pattern determination table 142B, when the variation pattern does not execute the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, the determined values are assigned to the operation system advance notice pattern YBP2-1 and the operation system advance notice pattern YBP2-2. ing. On the other hand, in the case of the variation pattern for executing the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, the determined value is assigned to both the operation system advance notice pattern YBP2-1 and the operation system advance notice pattern YBP2-2. Absent. Therefore, the operation system advance notice pattern YBP2-1 and the operation system advance notice pattern YBP2-2 are for executing the "push button repeated hit" notice effect in response to the case where the "pseudo-continuous" variable display effect is not executed. It is. The operation system advance notice pattern YBP2-3 to the operation system advance notice pattern YBP2-8 provide the "push button repeated hit" notice effect corresponding to the number of executions (total number of times) of the quasi-continuous variation in the "pseudo-ream" variable display effect. It is for execution.

  In the operation system advance notice pattern determination table 142C, an operation system advance notice pattern determination is made to one of the operation system advance notice pattern YBP3-1 to the operation system advance notice pattern YBP3-8 according to the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value SR2-2 is assigned. Then, in the operation system notice pattern determination table 142C, when the variation pattern does not execute the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, the determined values are assigned to the operation system notice pattern YBP3-1 and the operation system notice pattern YBP3-2. ing. On the other hand, in the case of the variation pattern for executing the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, the determined value is assigned to both the operation system advance notice pattern YBP3-1 and the operation system advance notice pattern YBP3-2. Absent. Therefore, the operation system advance notice pattern YBP3-1 and the operation system advance notice pattern YBP3-2 are for executing the “trigger button single shot” advance notice corresponding to the case where the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is not executed. It is. The operation system advance notice pattern YBP3-3 to the operation system advance notice pattern YBP3-8 provides the notice effect of “single trigger button” corresponding to the number of executions (total number of times) of the pseudo continuous change in the variable display effect of “pseudo train”. It is for execution.

  In the operation system advance notice pattern determination table 142D, an operation system advance notice pattern determination is made to one of the operation system advance notice pattern YBP4-1 to the operation system advance notice pattern YBP4-8 according to the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value SR2-2 is assigned. Then, in the operation system notice pattern determination table 142D, when the variation pattern does not execute the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, determined values are assigned to the operation system notice pattern YBP4-1 and the operation system notice pattern YBP4-2. ing. On the other hand, in the case of the variation pattern for executing the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, a determined value is assigned to both the operation system advance notice pattern YBP4-1 and the operation system advance notice pattern YBP4-2. Absent. Therefore, the operation system advance notice pattern YBP4-1 and the operation system advance notice pattern YBP4-2 are for executing the "trigger button repeated strike" advance notice corresponding to the case where the "pseudo-continuous" variable display effect is not executed. It is. The operation system advance notice pattern YBP4-3 to the operation system advance notice pattern YBP4-8 provide a notice effect of "trigger button repeated strike" corresponding to the number of executions (total number of times) of the pseudo continuous change in the variable display effect of "pseudo train". It is for execution.

  In the notice effect of “single push button” by the operation system notice pattern determined using the operation system notice pattern determination table 142A, after the variable display of the decorative design is started or at the same time as the variable display is started, For example, by displaying an effect image indicating the push button 31B and a message image such as “Push the button to aim” in the display area of the image display device 5, the player can perform one instruction operation on the push button 31B. A button operation promotion effect is urged. Subsequently, for example, by displaying an effect image of a character holding a bow and arrow toward the roulette, an effect operation is performed so that the player can perform an instruction operation of the push button 31B at an appropriate timing. When an operation action by the player is detected within the operation effective period, an effect image that is hit by the bow and arrow is displayed at the time of detection, or the shutters 38H and 38L are operated in the pseudo-ream effect. Therefore, it is only necessary that the player can be notified of the reliability such as the possibility that the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state and the possibility that the variable display result becomes “big hit”.

  As an example, in the roulette, a frame suggesting reliability such as “still still” or “extreme heat” is provided, and in the operation system notice pattern YBP1-1, a bow and arrow hits the “not yet” frame when an operation is detected. Thus, while notifying that the reliability is low, it is only necessary to notify that the reliability is high in the operation system notice pattern YBP1-2 by hitting the “extremely hot” frame when detecting the operation. While changing the effect mode at the time of detecting the operation of the push button 31B, changing the type of the character displayed as the effect image, and the display mode of the effect image showing the same character (for example, the color of the clothes of the character) are different. That the degree of reliability is different by changing the number of pseudo-reams, changing the shutter operation or non-operation when the pseudo-reams are re-variable, and changing any other aspect. So that the person can recognize it. If no instruction operation for the push button 31B is detected within the operation valid period, the notice effect ends without releasing the bow or arrow, or the pseudo-ream effect is not performed, and the player recognizes the reliability. It may not be possible. Thereby, operation with respect to push button 31B can be accelerated | stimulated, and the player's willingness to participate in a notice effect can be improved. The presentation operation in the “push button single-shot” notice effect is not limited to a game using a roulette, and may be an arbitrary game such as a game in which a bar graph that expands and contracts stops at a predetermined position. A predetermined message may be notified by an instruction operation on the push button 31B.

  It should be noted that, for example, the operation system advance notice pattern YBP1-7 and the operation system advance notice that are determined when the determined change pattern is a change pattern with three pseudo-continuations such as PA3-1 and PA3-2. In the pattern YBP1-8, in the operation system notice pattern YBP1-7, the image of the shutter is displayed on the image display device 5 to notify that the reliability is low, while in the operation system notice pattern YBP1-8, the shutter is displayed. What is necessary is just to alert | report that reliability is high because 38H and 38L operate | move actually.

  In the notice effect of “push button continuous hitting” by the operation system notice pattern determined using the operation system notice pattern decision table 142B, after the variable display of the decorative design is started or at the same time as the variable display is started, For example, the player can perform a continuous hitting operation on the push button 31B by displaying an effect image showing the push button 31B and a message image such as “Win the button repeatedly to win the tug of war” in the display area of the image display device 5. A button operation promotion effect is urged to be executed. Subsequently, for example, by displaying an effect image in which the self character and the opponent character perform a tug-of-war, an effect operation is performed so that the player can perform the continuous operation of the push button 31B. Then, based on the number of detections of the operation action by the player within the operation effective period, the detection interval, etc., displaying an effect image in which the degree of superiority or inferiority of the tug of war changes, and when the operation effective period ends, It is only necessary that the player can be informed of the reliability by displaying an effect image showing the result of the tug-of-war game or performing a pseudo-ream effect.

  As an example, in the operation system notice pattern YBP2-1, the result of the tug of war is lost, so that the reliability is low, while in the operation system notice pattern YBP2-2, the result of the tug of war is won. What is necessary is just to alert | report that reliability is high. However, even in the case of the operation system notice pattern YBP2-2, when the instruction operation for the push button 31B is not detected within the operation valid period or when the number of detections is less than the predetermined number, the result of the tug-of-war game is lost. The original reliability may not be notified. Thereby, operation with respect to push button 31B can be accelerated | stimulated, and the player's willingness to participate in a notice effect can be improved. The effect mode after the continuous hitting operation of the push button 31B is made different, the type of the self character and the opponent character displayed as the effect image is changed, and the effect image display mode showing the same self character and the opponent character (for example, Different clothing colors, etc., different display styles of display images (such as the presence or absence of ornaments, the color, thickness, length, number, etc.) of the self-character and opponent character, or What is necessary is just to enable a player to recognize that reliability differs by changing other arbitrary production | presentation aspects. The presentation operation in the “push button continuous strike” notice effect is not limited to a game that is a tug of war, for example, a game that extends a bar graph that expands to a predetermined length or more as an instruction operation on the push button 31B is detected, An arbitrary game may be played, or a predetermined message may be notified on the condition that the number of detections of the instruction operation for the push button 31B has reached a predetermined number.

  It should be noted that, for example, the operation system advance notice pattern YBP2-7 and the operation system advance notice that are determined when the determined change pattern is a change pattern with three pseudo-continuations such as PA3-1 and PA3-2. In the pattern YBP2-8, the operation system notice pattern YBP2-7 informs that the reliability is low by displaying the shutter image on the image display device 5, while the operation system notice pattern YBP2-8 provides the shutter. What is necessary is just to alert | report that reliability is high because 38H and 38L operate | move actually.

  In the notice effect of “single trigger button” by the operation system notice pattern determination table 142C determined using the operation system notice pattern determination table 142C, after the variable display of the decorative design is started or at the same time as the variable display is started, For example, by displaying an effect image showing the stick controller 30 and a message image such as “Let aim and fire!” In the display area of the image display device 5, etc., the tilting operation of the operating rod 30A and the trigger button 31A 1 A button operation promotion effect that prompts the player to perform the instruction operation for the first time is executed. Subsequently, for example, by displaying an effect image of a sight (scope) aiming at a flying airplane (enemy aircraft) so that the display position can be changed, the player performs the tilting operation of the operation rod 30A. An effect operation is performed so that the trigger button 31A can be instructed at the timing. When an instruction operation on the trigger button 31A is detected within the operation effective period, an effect image in which a shell is fired at the time of detection is displayed, and an effect image indicating whether or not the enemy aircraft has been successfully shot down. Or by operating the shutters 38H and 38L in the pseudo-rendition, etc., so long as the player can recognize the reliability.

  As an example, in the operation system warning pattern YBP3-1, the aim is not matched with the enemy aircraft regardless of the tilting operation mode of the operation rod 30A, and the enemy aircraft is not hit and cannot be shot down, so that the reliability is low. To do. On the other hand, in the operation system notice pattern YBP3-2, the aim is matched to the enemy aircraft according to the tilting operation of the operation rod 30A, and the bullet fired at this time hits the enemy aircraft and can shoot down, so the reliability is high. Inform the effect. Note that even if the operation system notice pattern YBP3-2 is used, the enemy aircraft may not be shot down if the bullet is fired in a state where the aim does not match the enemy aircraft. Alternatively, in the operation system notice pattern YBP3-2, even if a bullet is fired in a state where the aim does not match the enemy aircraft, the bullet may hit the enemy aircraft and be shot down. Different types of effects when detecting the operation of the trigger button 31A, different types of enemy aircraft (eg, propeller aircraft, jet fighters, virtual flying objects, etc.) displayed as the effect image, The player may be able to recognize that the reliability is different by changing the display mode of the effect image indicating the color (for example, the color of the machine body) or by changing the other arbitrary display mode. Note that when the instruction operation for the trigger button 31A is not detected within the operation valid period, the notice effect may be ended, for example, by the enemy aircraft being shot down by an enemy aircraft attack. Thereby, operation with respect to the operating rod 30A and the trigger button 31A can be promoted, and the player's willingness to participate in the notice effect can be improved. The directing action of the “trigger button single shot” notice effect is not limited to a game that shoots down enemy aircraft, but may be an arbitrary game such as a game that captures one prey that escapes. Alternatively, if one of a plurality of cards is selected, a predetermined message written on the card may be notified.

  It should be noted that, for example, the operation system advance notice pattern YBP3-7 and the operation system advance notice that are determined when the determined change pattern is a change pattern with three pseudo-continuations such as PA3-1 and PA3-2. In the pattern YBP3-8, the operation system notice pattern YBP3-7 informs that the reliability is low by displaying the shutter image on the image display device 5, while the operation system notice pattern YBP3-8 has a shutter. What is necessary is just to alert | report that reliability is high because 38H and 38L operate | move actually.

  In the notice effect of “trigger button repeated hit” by the operation system notice pattern determined using the operation system notice pattern determination table 142D, after the variable display of the decorative design is started or at the same time as the variable display is started, For example, by displaying an effect image showing the stick controller 30 and a message image such as “Let's aim and shoot!” In the display area of the image display device 5, etc. A button operation promotion effect that prompts the player to perform the operation is executed. Next, for example, by displaying the effect image of the aiming (scope) aiming at the flying airplane (enemy aircraft) so that the display position can be changed, as in the notice effect of “single trigger button”, An effect operation is performed so that the player can perform the continuous operation of the trigger button 31A while performing the tilting operation of the operation rod 30A. Each time an instruction operation on the trigger button 31A is detected within the operation valid period, an effect image in which a shell is fired at the time of detection is displayed, and the degree of aim matching, the number of detections of the instruction operation, the detection interval, etc. are displayed. Based on this, an effect image in which the degree to which the enemy aircraft is destroyed changes is displayed. After that, when the operation valid period ends, it is only necessary that the player can be notified of the reliability by displaying an effect image indicating whether or not the enemy aircraft has been successfully shot down.

  As an example, in the operation system notice pattern YBP4-1, the enemy aircraft cannot be shot down regardless of the degree to which the shell hits the enemy aircraft, thereby notifying that the reliability is low. On the other hand, in the operation system notice pattern YBP4-2, if the enemy aircraft has been hit at least once, the enemy aircraft can be shot down, thereby notifying that the reliability is high. Alternatively, in the operation system notice pattern YBP4-2, even if the enemy aircraft is not hit, the enemy aircraft may be shot down as long as the shell is fired. On the other hand, even in the operation system notice pattern YBP4-2, when the enemy aircraft is not hit or when the number of shots is less than a predetermined number, the degree of destruction of the enemy aircraft reaches a certain level. If not, the enemy aircraft may not be shot down so that the original reliability is not notified. Thereby, the tilting operation of the operating rod 30A and the operation on the trigger button 31A can be promoted, and the player's willingness to participate in the notice effect can be improved. Similarly to the “trigger button single shot” notice effect, the player may be informed that the reliability is different by changing the type of enemy aircraft, the display mode of the enemy aircraft, and the like. The directing action in the notice effect of “triggering the trigger button” is not limited to a game that shoots down enemy aircraft, and may be an arbitrary game such as a game that captures a plurality of prey that escapes. If a plurality of cards are sequentially selected, a predetermined message having a specific meaning depending on the combination of the cards may be notified.

  It should be noted that, for example, the operation system advance notice pattern YBP4-7 and the operation system advance notice that are determined when the determined change pattern is a change pattern with three pseudo-continuations such as PA3-1 and PA3-2. In the pattern YBP4-8, in the operation system notice pattern YBP4-7, the image of the shutter is displayed on the image display device 5 to notify that the reliability is low, while in the operation system notice pattern YBP4-8, the shutter is displayed. What is necessary is just to alert | report that reliability is high because 38H and 38L operate | move actually.

  The operation valid period in the notice effect that is the operation-related notice starts after the button operation promotion effect is executed, and then, for example, the decorative symbols are temporarily displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. It may be ended before the stop display is performed (before the decorative symbol variable display state becomes the reach state). Alternatively, when notifying that there is a possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit”, the operation effective period continues until a predetermined time elapses even after the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state. Also good.

  In the operation system advance notice pattern YBP1-3 to the operation system advance notice pattern YBP1-8, the advance notice by either the operation system advance notice pattern YBP1-1 or the operation system advance notice pattern YBP1-2 corresponding to each of the initial fluctuation and the pseudo continuous fluctuation. What is necessary is just to set so that the production | generation operation | movement according to one instruction | indication operation with respect to push button 31B may be performed by the production | presentation aspect similar to a production | presentation, or a different production | presentation aspect. Or you may make it perform the notification effect which alert | reports reliability according to one instruction | indication operation with respect to the push button 31B by a series of production | presentation operation | movement over the whole first time fluctuation and pseudo | simulation continuous fluctuation | variation.

  In the operation system notification pattern YBP2-3 to the operation system notification pattern YBP2-8, the operation system notification pattern YBP2-1 or the operation system notification pattern YBP2-2 is notified in accordance with each of the initial variation and the pseudo continuous variation. What is necessary is just to set so that the production | generation operation | movement according to the continuous striking operation with respect to push button 31B may be performed by the production | presentation aspect similar to a production | presentation, or different production | presentation aspects. Or you may make it perform the notification effect which alert | reports a reliability according to the continuous striking operation with respect to the push button 31B by the series of production | presentation operation | movement over the whole of first time fluctuation | variation and pseudo | simulation continuous fluctuation | variation.

  In the operation system notification pattern YBP3-3 to the operation system notification pattern YBP3-8, the operation system notification pattern YBP3-1 or the operation system notification pattern YBP3-2 is notified in accordance with each of the initial variation and the pseudo continuous variation. What is necessary is just to set so that the production | generation operation | movement according to tilting operation of the operating rod 30A and one instruction | indication operation with respect to the trigger button 31A may be performed by the production | presentation aspect different from a production | presentation, or a different production | presentation aspect. Alternatively, by performing a series of presentation operations over the entire initial variation and pseudo-continuous variation, a notification effect may be performed to notify the reliability in accordance with the tilting operation of the operation rod 30A or one instruction operation on the trigger button 31A. Good.

  In the operation system notification pattern YBP4-3 to the operation system notification pattern YBP4-8, the operation system notification pattern YBP4-1 or the operation system notification pattern YBP4-2 is notified in accordance with each of the initial variation and the pseudo continuous variation. It is only necessary to set so that the production operation according to the tilting operation of the operating rod 30A or the continuous hitting operation on the trigger button 31A is performed in the production mode similar to the production or a different production mode. Or you may make it perform the notification effect which alert | reports a reliability according to the tilting operation of the operating rod 30A, or the continuous striking operation with respect to the trigger button 31A by a series of production | presentation operation | movement over the whole of first time fluctuation | variation and pseudo | simulation continuous fluctuation | variation.

  The operation system notice pattern may include a pattern that does not perform the notice effect that becomes the operation system notice in part of the initial fluctuation and the pseudo series fluctuation due to the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”. However, the reliability of the notice effect that is executed in response to the change display after the execution of the pseudo continuous change (after the re-change) is the advance notice that is executed in response to the previous change display (initial change or pseudo continuous change). It may be more than the reliability of the production. In addition, when a notice effect that becomes an operation system notice is once performed in either the initial fluctuation or the pseudo-continuous fluctuation, a notice effect that becomes an operation system notice is performed corresponding to all the pseudo-series fluctuations thereafter. Set as follows. As a result, when the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, the expectation that the variable display result becomes “big hit” as the number of pseudo-variable increases increases, but the reliability of the notice effect is increased. It is possible to prevent a decrease in game entertainment due to a decrease in the degree and interruption of the notice effect.

  FIG. 21 is a diagram showing various effect control pattern tables 143 stored in the ROM 121, a hit end effect determination table 144 for determining a hit end effect, and a stage (mode) determination table 145.

  In the various effect control pattern table 143, data indicating the contents of various effect controls in the period controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state is stored according to rounds or the like. In each effect control pattern, a plurality of control data for controlling various effect operations such as a process timer set value, display control execution data, and lamp control execution data are set in time series.

  In addition, in the seed effect control pattern table 143, as shown in FIG. 21A, the effect control pattern having different effect contents of the hit end effect, which is the effect performed at the end of the hit, is included in the number of rounds. When the number of rounds is set to 2 and the production control pattern is determined when the number of rounds is two, the transition to the latent probability change (high accuracy low base state) state is not made (the normal state or the high accuracy high base state is entered). Hit end CED1-1 which is an effect control pattern determined in the case), hit end CED2-2 and hit end CED2-3 which are effect control patterns determined when shifting to the latent probability changing state are set. Yes.

  In the hit end CED2-2 and the hit end CED2-3 that are the effect control patterns determined when shifting to the latent probability changing state, the hit end effect determining table for determining the hit end effect in FIG. As shown at 144, the hit end CED2-2 includes the contents of the effect that the shutter of the image is displayed without operating the shutters 38H and 38L, and the hit end CED2-3 operates the shutters 38H and 38L. The contents of the effects are included, and each effect control pattern includes a case where the game state after the hit is a small hit that does not change from the game state before the hit, and a case where the game state after the hit ends becomes a latent probability change. In this case, the determination value of the random value SR3 for determining the end (ending) effect in different ranges is assigned.

  Specifically, as the determination value of the random value SR3 for determining the hit end (ending) effect, the hit end CED2-2 where the shutters 38H and 38L are not operated is 1 to 7 (the number of determination values) in the case of a small hit. In the case where the judgment value in the range of 7) is assigned, but in the case of the collision probability that becomes the latent probability variation, the judgment value in the range of 8 to 10 (number of judgment values 3) is assigned, and the shutters 38H and 38L are operated. In the hit end CED2-3, a judgment value in the range of 1 to 3 (number of judgment values 3) is assigned in the case of a small hit, whereas in a case of a sudden hit that becomes a latent probability change, 4 to In the case where the judgment value in the range of 10 (the number of judgment values is 7) is assigned, and by setting the judgment value of the random value SR3 for determining the hitting end (ending) effect in this way, when shifting to the latent probability variation, , Hit the end When a large number of CED2-3 are determined and the shutters 38H and 38L are operated, a lot of hitting (ending) effects are performed. Many hitting end (ending) effects that do not operate 38L are implemented. Therefore, when the shutters 38H and 38L are operated in the hitting end (ending) effect, there is a high possibility of the latent probability change, and when the shutters 38H and 38L are not operated, the possibility of the latent probability change is small. ) By the operation / non-operation of the shutters 38H and 38L in the production, the player is notified of the possibility of the latent probability change.

  When the random value SR3 for determining the end (ending) effect is extracted, the random value SR4 for determining the stage (mode) type is extracted together with the random value SR3 for determining the end (ending) effect. The extracted random number SR4 is compared with the stage (mode) determination table 145 shown in FIG. 21C, so that the stage (mode) type after the end of ending effect is the day mode, Either dusk mode or night mode is determined. In the daytime mode, a bright background image corresponding to the daytime state is used, in the dusk mode, a sunset background image corresponding to the dusk state is used, and in the night mode, a dark background image corresponding to the nighttime state is used. For example, the player may be notified whether the current mode is the daytime mode, the dusk mode, or the night mode.

  In this stage (mode) determination table 145, as in the hit end effect determination table 144, the game state after the end of hit is not changed from the game state before hit for each of the day mode, dusk mode, and night mode. A random value SR4 for determining a stage (mode) type in a different range is assigned to the case of winning, and the case of a winning hit in which the gaming state after the winning is changed to a latent probability change.

  Specifically, as a determination value of the random value SR4 for determining the stage (mode) type, in the daytime mode, a determination value in the range of 1 to 6 (6 determination values) is assigned in the case of a small hit. On the other hand, only 1 (the number of judgment values is 1) is assigned in the case of a sudden hit that becomes a latent probability change, and in the dusk mode, 7 to 9 (the number of judgment values is 3) in the case of a small hit. In the case of an abrupt accuracy hit with a latent probability change, a determination value in the range of 2 to 4 (number of determination values 3) is assigned, and in the night mode, it is a small hit. In this case, only a judgment value of 10 (the number of judgment values is 1) is assigned, whereas in the case of a collision probability that becomes a latent probability change, a judgment value in the range of 5 to 10 (the number of judgment values is 6) is assigned. In the dusk mode While less likely to be determined in day mode liable night mode is determined, if not latent probability variation is hardly daytime mode and dusk mode is determined on the night mode easily determined. That is, it is set so that the possibility of a latent probability change is greater in the dusk mode than in the daytime mode and in the night mode than in the dusk mode. Accordingly, in the case of the latent probability change, the night mode often occurs after the shutters 38H and 38L are operated in the hit end (ending) effect, whereas in the case of the latent probability change, the hit end (ending) occurs. In the production, the shutter mode 38H, 38L does not operate and the shutter mode is displayed, and the day mode is often entered (if the previous mode is the day mode, there is no change).

  Therefore, in the case of these small hits or sudden hits, after the fluctuation patterns PC1-4 and PC1-5 are determined and the normal reach occurs, the normal reach is lost and the opening control is performed twice. There are a case where a shutter image that is an expanded display is displayed and shifts to latent probability change, and a case where the shutters 38H and 38L that are movable objects are operated to shift to latent probability change, and these shutter images are displayed. The type of stage (mode) to be determined and the reliability, which is the latent probability change, differ depending on whether the shutters 38H and 38L are operated.

  In this embodiment, the reliability, which is a latent probability change, varies depending on whether the shutters 38H and 38L, which are movable objects, are operated or not, and on the determined stage (mode) type. The reliability of the latent probability change may be notified only by either one of the operation / non-operation of the shutters 38H and 38L, which are animals, or the determined stage (mode) type.

  The ROM 121 further stores a stage (mode) change determination table (not shown) for determining whether or not to change the stage (mode) using the random value SR4 for determining the stage (mode) type. The stage (mode) determined as described above is the random value SR4 for determining the stage (mode) type every time the special game is executed in the low base state that is the normal state or the latent probability changing state. Is extracted and compared with the stage (mode) change determination table to determine whether or not to change the stage (mode).

  Specifically, in the stage (mode) change determination table, for example, in the same manner as the stage (mode) determination table 145, the game state for each change (mode down), no change, and change (mode up). It is only necessary to assign a random value SR4 in a different range between the normal state and the latent probability change.

  For example, for “changed (mode down)” in which the night mode changes to the dusk mode or the dusk mode changes to the day mode, 1 to 6 (the number of judgment values is 6) in the normal state. In the case where the range judgment value is assigned, in the case of the latent probability variation, only the judgment value of 1 (number of judgment values 1) is assigned. In the case of the latent probability variation, a judgment value in the range of 2 to 4 (judgment value number 3) is assigned, and the daytime mode is assigned. For “changed (mode up)” in which the mode changes to the dusk mode or the dusk mode changes to the night mode, a judgment value of only 10 (the judgment value number 1) is assigned in the normal state. On the other hand, if it is a latent probability change, Since the determination value in the range of 0 (the number of determination values is 6) is assigned, in the case of the latent probability change, the possibility of changing to the night mode is large and the night mode is likely to be sustained for a long time, whereas the latency is In the case of a certain change, it may be set so that the possibility of changing to the daytime mode is high and the daytime mode is easily maintained for a long time.

  In addition to the pattern data indicating the contents of various effects control during the period controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state, the ROM 121 stores the effect as stored in the various effect control pattern table 143. A plurality of types of pattern data constituting an effect control pattern used for the control CPU 120 to control various effect operations are stored in advance. As such effect control patterns, for example, the symbol fluctuation control pattern shown in the symbol fluctuation control pattern table 146 shown in FIG. 22A, or the notice effect control pattern shown in the notice effect control pattern tables 148 and 149 shown in FIGS. Etc. should be included.

  The symbol variation control pattern relates to a variable display operation of the decorative symbol in the display area of the image display device 5 in a period from when the decorative symbol variable display is started to when the final decorative symbol which is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. What is necessary is just to be comprised in advance by pattern data etc. which show the contents of control, corresponding to the variation pattern of a decoration design. Further, different symbol variation control patterns may be prepared corresponding to a plurality of types of effect modes (stages) such as a daytime mode, a dusk mode, and a night mode in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Each of the plurality of symbol variation control patterns includes a decorative symbol display position and a decorative symbol display position in a variable symbol display performed using a final symbol that is a final stop symbol, a temporary stop symbol that is temporarily stopped during variable display, and the like. It is only necessary to define a time schedule such as the size, the direction of variation of the decorative pattern, and the variation speed. Here, the final stop symbol, the temporary stop symbol, etc. are determined at the start of variable display based on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. If it is.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 22 (A), the shutter 38H is set when reach is reached, corresponding to each of the variation patterns of the decorative pattern that is in the reach state, except in the case of a hit or small hit. , 38L without operating the symbol variation control pattern for displaying the shutter image on the image display device 5 (the suffix is N) and the symbol variation control pattern for activating the shutters 38H, 38L when the reach is established (the suffix is P) in advance. The player is notified of the possibility of a big hit depending on whether or not the shutters 38H and 38L are operated when the reach is established.

  For the super reach α and β without pseudo-ream, the symbol variation control pattern is set so that the shutters 38H and 38L operate when the reach of the super reach α is established, and the shutters 38H and 38L do not operate when the reach of the super reach β is established. Has been. As for the super reach β, the symbol variation control pattern (SPB3-2P) in which the shutters 38H and 38L operate when the reach state established first becomes a loss and develops into the super reach, and when developing into the super reach. In addition, a symbol variation control pattern (SPB3-2N) in which the shutters 38H and 38L do not operate is set in advance, and depending on whether or not the shutters 38H and 38L operate when the reach state is lost and develops into super reach. The player is informed of the possibility of a big hit.

  Specifically, the ROM 121 stores the shutter movement distribution determination table for reach shown in FIG. 22B together with the symbol variation control pattern table 146 shown in FIG. 22A, and these shutter operation distribution determination tables for reach. Is compared with the random number SR2-1 to obtain a symbol variation control pattern (P at the end) that operates the shutters 38H and 38L, or a shutter image is displayed without operating the shutters 38H and 38L. It is determined whether the symbol variation control pattern to be displayed on the screen (the end is N).

  In the setting example shown in FIG. 22B, in the SPB2-1, SPB2-2, SPA3-1, and SPA3-2 that are variation patterns that cause a loss, a symbol variation control pattern that displays a shutter image that ends with N. Is assigned to a large number of decision values, while SPB4-1 is a variation pattern that is assigned a small number of decision values to the symbol variation control pattern in which the shutters 38H and 38L ending with P operate. In SPB 4-2, SPA 5-1, and SPA 5-2, a small number of determination values are assigned to a symbol variation control pattern that displays a shutter image that ends with N, while shutters 38 H and 38 L that end with P are provided. Reach is established if there is a loss due to the large number of judgment values assigned to the operating symbol fluctuation control pattern. In many cases, a shutter image is displayed on the image display device 5, and in the case of a big hit, the shutters 38H and 38L are often operated when the reach is established, so that the shutters 38H and 38L are operated. In such a case, there is a high possibility of a big hit, and when the shutters 38H and 38L do not operate (when an image shutter is displayed), the possibility of a big hit is low.

  Similarly, in the setting example shown in FIG. 22B, for the super reach β, in the SPB 3-2 which is a fluctuation pattern that causes a loss, the end is N and a shutter image is displayed when the super reach is developed. A large number of determination values are allocated to the symbol variation control pattern to be performed, while a small number of determination values are allocated to the symbol variation control pattern in which the shutter 38H and 38L operate when the end is P and the shutter 38H and 38L are operated. In SPB5-2, which is a winning variation pattern, the end is N, and a smaller number of determination values is assigned to the symbol variation control pattern that displays a shutter image when developing to super reach, while the end Is a symbol fluctuation control pattern in which the shutters 38H and 38L operate when P is developed and super-reach is developed. When a lot of judgment values are assigned, it is determined that a shutter image is often displayed on the image display device 5 when developing to super reach in the case of losing, and in the case of big hit, super reach is determined. In many cases, the shutters 38H and 38L are operated when the shutters 38H and 38L are developed. Therefore, if the shutters 38H and 38L are operated when the shutters 38H and 38L are operated, the possibility of a big hit is high. When the shutters 38H and 38L do not operate at this time (when the image shutter is displayed), the possibility of a big hit is low.

  The preview effect control pattern shown in FIG. 23 is composed of pattern data indicating the control contents of the effect operation in the notice effect, and a plurality of the notice effect patterns corresponding to the contents of the effect operation in the notice effect are prepared in advance. That's fine. For example, the plurality of notice effect control patterns are classified into display type notice types, such as a notice effect control pattern corresponding to the display type notice type shown in FIG. In accordance with one of the multiple display system notice patterns prepared in advance for executing the notice effect, the one specifying the time schedule such as the display position and size of the effect image and the update display procedure is included. Just do it.

  Note that the notice effect control patterns corresponding to the display system notice types shown in FIG. 23 include those having the operation control of the shutters 38H and 38L, and the image of the shutter without operating the shutters 38H and 38L. Having display control to display on the screen. Specifically, for the notice effect control patterns STA2-2 to STA2-4 set when the step up notice is determined as the type of the notice effect, the shutters 38H and 38L are operated (temporarily) at the time of step up. In the step-up notice that develops beyond the second step, the shutters 38H and 38L are temporarily closed at the time of step-up (when the notice effect is developed). The operation is performed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 23, the notice effect control pattern of each pseudo-continuous number that becomes two or more pseudo-continuous fluctuations is often determined at the time of a loss and rarely determined at the time of a big hit (FIG. 17). ) (See FIG. 18), the reliability that is a big hit is low and the reliability is low, and it is often determined at the time of big hit and rarely determined at the time of loss (see FIG. 17, FIG. 18). The high reliability and the high reliability are set in advance, and these high-reliability notice effect control patterns include operation control for operating the shutters 38H and 38L at the start of re-variation of variable display in the pseudo-ream. On the other hand, the low-reliability notice effect control pattern causes the image display device 5 to display a shutter image at the start of re-variation of variable display in the pseudo-ream. In these pseudo-annual notice effects, whether or not the possibility of a big hit is large or small depending on whether or not the shutters 38H and 38L operate at the start of re-variation of variable display (reliability level). Is high or low).

  In addition, the plurality of notice effect control patterns are classified into operation type notice types, such as the notice effect control pattern corresponding to the operation type notice type shown in FIG. , Display position and size of the effect image, update display corresponding to any of the plurality of operation-related notice patterns prepared in advance to execute the notice effect such as “single trigger button” and “trigger trigger button” It is only necessary to define a time schedule such as a procedure, a setting of an operation effective period for effectively detecting an operation action by a player, and a setting for switching an effect operation when an operation is detected.

  In addition, regarding these operation type advance notice types, similarly to the display type advance notice type, a high-reliability and low-reliability notice effect control pattern is set. Since the notification is given during the production as a result of the operation, operation control for operating the shutters 38H and 38L with respect to the announcement production control patterns corresponding to the high reliability and the low reliability, and the shutter image are displayed on the image display device 5. Although the display control to be performed is not set, the present invention is not limited to this, and the high-reliability and low-quality are also applied to the notice effect control patterns of these operation-type notice types, similarly to the display-type notice type. Operation control for operating the shutters 38H and 38L and display control for displaying the shutter image on the image display device 5 may be set for the notice effect control pattern corresponding to the reliability. There.

  FIG. 25A shows a configuration example of each such effect control pattern. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 25A, the effect control pattern includes, for example, an effect control process timer determination value, display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, shutter control data, hold display position change control. Consists of process data, which is control data for controlling various performance operations such as data and end codes. The contents of various performance controls, the hold display position change flag, the timing of switching the performance control, etc. in time series Should be set.

  The effect control process timer determination value is a value (determination value) to be compared with an effect control process timer value that is a stored value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 shown in FIG. A determination value corresponding to the execution time (production time) of the production operation is set in advance. In place of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command is received from the main board 11, or a predetermined process is executed as a process for controlling the effect operation in the effect control CPU 120. The data indicating the switching timing of effect control or the like may be set corresponding to predetermined control content or processing content.

  The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, such as data indicating the variation mode of each decorative pattern during variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the display control data is data that designates the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5. The voice control data includes data indicating the voice output mode from the speakers 8L and 8R, such as data indicating the output mode of sound effects in conjunction with the variable display operation of the decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol, for example. Yes. That is, the audio control data is data that designates an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R. The lamp control data includes data indicating the lighting operation mode of the light emitter, such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decoration LED. That is, the lamp control data is data for designating the lighting operation of the light emitter.

  The operation detection control data includes, for example, an operation valid period for effectively detecting the tilting operation with respect to the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 and the instruction operation with respect to the trigger button 31A, or the operation validity for effectively detecting the instruction operation with respect to the push button 31B. Data indicating an effect operation mode according to the player's operation action is included, such as data specifying the period and the control content of the effect operation when each operation is detected effectively. Here, the operation detection control data is limited so that the instruction operation for the push button 31B is not detected in the operation valid period in which the tilt operation for the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 and the instruction operation for the trigger button 31A are detected effectively ( It is only necessary to be set to prohibit. Further, the operation detection control data limits (prohibits) the detection of the tilting operation with respect to the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 and the detection of the instruction operation with respect to the trigger button 31A in the operation effective period in which the instruction operation with respect to the push button 31B is effectively detected. ) As long as it is set.

  The shutter control data includes the upper shutter 38H and the lower shutter 38H, such as data specifying the drive control details of the shutter motor 36H that operates the upper shutter 38H and the drive control details of the shutter motor 36L that operates the lower shutter 38L. It is only necessary to include data capable of individually operating the side shutter 38L.

  The hold display position change flag control data only needs to include data for instructing to set or reset the hold display position change flag. For example, the hold display position change flag control for instructing the set of the hold display position change flag. The data includes process data immediately before one of the shutters 38H and 38L is operated by the shutter control data, and process data at the time when an operation valid period for effectively detecting the operation of the trigger button 31A or the push button 31B is started. By being set so as to be included, immediately before any one of the shutters 38H and 38L operates or when the operation of the trigger button 31A or the push button 31B is validated, the first reserved memory number display area 5D and the second The display position of the reserved storage number display area 5U is changed.

  Note that these control data do not have to be included in all the effect control patterns, but an effect control pattern configured to include a part of the control data according to the contents of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be. Further, in the plural types of process data included in the effect control pattern, the types of control data constituting each process data may be different according to the contents of the effect operation executed at each timing. That is, some process data includes all of the display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, shutter control data, and hold display position change flag control data, and some of these process data are included. There may also be process data consisting of Further, for example, in the case of providing other movable members included in the effect actor in addition to the shutters 38H and 38L, in addition to the shutter control data, other movable member control data indicating the operation mode of the movable member. Various control data may be included.

  FIG. 25B shows various effect operations executed according to the contents of the effect control pattern. The production control CPU 120 determines the control content of the production operation according to various control data included in the production control pattern. For example, when the production control process timer value matches one of the production control process timer determination values, the decorative design is displayed in a manner specified by the display control data associated with the production control process timer determination value, and the character Control is performed to display an effect image such as an image or a background image in the display area of the image display device 5. In addition, control is performed to output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner specified by the sound control data, and control is performed to flash a light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp control data. In the mode specified by the shutter control data, control is performed to accept the operation on the operation rod 30A, the trigger button 31A, or the push button 31B of the stick controller 30 during the operation valid period specified by the detection control data, and to determine the production contents. The shutter motors 36H and 36L are driven to control the shutters 38H and 38L, and the hold display position change flag is set or reset according to the designation of the hold display position change flag control data. Note that dummy data (data not specifying control) may be set as data corresponding to a production component that does not become a control target even though it corresponds to the production control process timer determination value.

  The effect control CPU 120 sets the effect control pattern based on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, for example, when starting variable display of decorative symbols. Here, when setting the effect control pattern, the pattern data constituting the corresponding effect control pattern may be read from the ROM 121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the corresponding effect control pattern is configured. The storage address of the pattern data in the ROM 121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and the reading position of the storage data in the ROM 121 may be designated. After that, every time the production control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the production control process timer judgment values. If they match, the production operation according to the corresponding various control data Control. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect devices (image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, shutter 38H, shutter 38H, in accordance with the contents of process data # 1 to process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern. 38L, the light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9) are controlled. In each process data # 1 to process data #n, display control data # 1 to display control data #n and voice control data # 1 to voice control associated with production control process timer determination values # 1 to #n are provided. Data #n, lamp control data # 1 to lamp control data #n, operation detection control data # 1 to operation detection control data #n, shutter control data # 1 to shutter control data #n, hold display position change flag control data are The control contents of the rendering operation in the rendering device are shown, and the rendering control execution data # 1 to the rendering control execution data #n for designating the rendering control are configured.

  A command according to the production control pattern set in this way is output from the production control CPU 120 to the display control unit 123, the audio control board 13, the shutter motors 36H, 36L, and the like. In the display control unit 123 that has received a command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, a predetermined VDP or the like is developed by reading out image data indicated by the command from an image data memory such as CGROM and temporarily storing it in the VRAM. On the voice control board 13 that has received a command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, the voice synthesis IC reads out the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and temporarily stores it in the voice RAM or the like. . Also, the shutter motors 36H and 36L that have received a command (drive signal) from the effect control CPU 120 operate the shutters 38H and 38L (the upper shutter 38H is moved downward and the lower shutter 38H is moved upward). The display area of the display device 5 is opened and closed.

  In the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 3, for example, an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. 26 is used as an area for holding various data used for controlling the hold display and the effect operation. Is provided. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 26 includes a special figure storage unit 195, an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit. 194.

  In the special figure storage unit 195, the first number in the passage (entrance) of the game ball is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning (game ball detection order) to the first start winning port or the second start winning port. A value (0 (no winning), 1) corresponding to the winning determination result designation command transmitted from the main board 11 when the winning effect determining process is performed based on the establishment of the starting condition or the second starting condition. (With a prize), 2 (notice object, out of date), 4 (notice object, hit)) are stored for each of the first special figure and the second special figure. In this way, the data stored in the special figure storage unit 195 is displayed in the first reserved memory number display area 5D and the second reserved memory number display area 5U, and the display of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number and the display of the hold notice. (See FIG. 45). It should be noted that an area in which a value corresponding to the winning determination result designation command for the first special figure is stored is a first holding storage unit, and a value corresponding to the winning determination result designation command for the second special figure is stored. This area may be referred to as a second reserved storage unit.

  In the effect control flag setting unit 191, for example, a state according to an effect operation state such as an effect image display state on the display screen of the image display device 5, a display state of a hold storage display, an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, or the like. A plurality of types of flags that can be updated are provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as an effect image display operation on the display screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the production control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the production control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters. As an example, the effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a random counter for counting part or all of numerical data indicating random values (effect random numbers) used for controlling the progress of the effect operation. Just do it.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 3 determines the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 120. For example, the display control unit 123 executes various types of effect display such as variable display of decorative symbols and effect display in reach effects by determining the switching timing of effect images to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. The first hold memory number and the second hold memory number are displayed in the first hold memory number display area 5D and the second hold memory number display area 5U by the hold control instruction and the hold non-display instruction from the CPU 120 for effect control. Or control for non-display is performed. The display control unit 123 may be configured to include a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), an LCD drive circuit, and the like.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is transmitted from, for example, an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 or the like, a trigger sensor 35A, a push sensor 35B, a tilt direction sensor unit 32, and shutter sensors 37H and 37L. An input port for capturing various signals such as operation detection signals and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 are configured. For example, from the output port of the I / O 125, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 5, a command (sound effect signal) transmitted to the sound control board 13, and a command transmitted to the lamp control board 14 (Illumination signal), transmitted to the shutter motors 36H and 36L, and a command (drive signal) is output.

  On the voice control board 13, for example, an input / output driver, a voice synthesis IC, a voice data ROM, an amplifier circuit, a volume, and the like are mounted. As an example, in the voice control board 13, the sound number data indicated in the sound effect signal transmitted from the effect control board 12 is input to the voice synthesis IC via the input / output driver. The voice synthesis IC generates voice and sound effects corresponding to the sound number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit. The amplifier circuit outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume to the speakers 8L and 8R. The voice data ROM stores control data corresponding to the sound number data, and the voice synthesis IC reads out the control data corresponding to the sound number data to generate voice and sound effects. The data stored in the audio data ROM only needs to be composed of data indicating the output mode of audio and sound effects in a predetermined period in a time series.

  For example, an input / output driver and a lamp driver are mounted on the lamp control board 14. As an example, in the lamp control board 14, the electrical decoration signal transmitted from the effect control board 12 is input to the lamp driver via the input / output driver. The lamp driver amplifies the electric decoration signal and supplies it to the game effect lamp 9 and the like.

  Here, the structure of the shutter unit 500 including the shutters 38H and 38L in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 53 is a schematic exploded perspective view showing the structure of the shutter unit. 54A is an enlarged vertical sectional view showing an attachment portion between the shutter 38H and the left guide member, and FIG. 54B is an enlarged vertical sectional view showing an attachment portion between the shutter 38L and the left guide member. is there. 55A is an enlarged vertical sectional view showing an attachment portion between the shutter 38H and the right guide member, and FIG. 55B is an enlarged vertical sectional view showing an attachment portion between the shutter 38L and the right guide member. is there. 56A is a schematic view showing a state where the shutters 38H and 38L are located at the retracted position, and FIG. 56B is a schematic view showing a state where the shutters 38H and 38L are located at the front position. is there. In the following description, the lower left side in FIG. 53 is described as the front side of the shutter unit, and the upper right side is described as the rear side of the shutter unit.

  As shown in FIG. 53, the shutter unit 500 includes a square frame-shaped frame plate 502 having a horizontally long rectangular opening 503 formed at the center, and a pair of upper and lower portions provided on the front side of the frame plate 502 so as to be movable in the vertical direction. Shutters 38H and 38L, shutter motors 36H and 36L provided on the rear side of the frame plate 502 for driving the shutter 38, and detecting that these shutters 38H and 38L are located at the storage position. The shutter sensor 37H is mainly composed of 37L.

  Although not particularly illustrated, the shutter unit 500 is disposed in a standing posture on the front side of the image display device 5 provided on the back surface of the opening 503. The opening 503 is formed in substantially the same shape as the display surface of the image display device 5 disposed on the back side of the frame plate 502, and the display surface is formed so as to be visible from the front side of the game board 2 through the opening 503. ing.

  The shutters 38H and 38L are configured by plate-like members having a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front. Mounting pieces 508a and 508b for mounting guide members 520L and 520R, which will be described later, are formed outward from the left and right sides of the shutter 38H, and guide members 521L and 521R described later from the left and right sides of the shutter 38L. The mounting pieces 509a and 509b for mounting are attached outward.

  The shutter 38H is located between a storage position (see FIG. 56A) disposed on the front surface of the upper side portion of the frame plate 502 and a front surface position (see FIG. 56B) disposed above the opening 503. It is provided so as to be movable. The shutter 38L is located between a storage position (see FIG. 56A) disposed on the front surface of the lower side of the frame plate 502 and a front surface position (see FIG. 56B) disposed below the opening 503. It is provided so as to be movable.

  A rod-shaped guide member 520L having a U-shaped cross section is mounted on the left mounting piece 508a of the shutter 38H so as to extend downward, and a bar-shaped guide member 508b having a U-shaped cross section is mounted on the right mounting piece 508b. The guide member 520R is attached so as to extend downward. A rod-shaped guide member 521L having a U-shaped cross section is attached to the left mounting piece 509a of the shutter 38L so as to extend upward, and the right-side mounting piece 509b has a U-shaped cross section. The rod-shaped guide member 521R is attached so as to extend upward.

  A driving rack gear 526H meshing with a driving pinion gear 565H, which will be described later, is formed on the inner surface of the guide member 520R in the longitudinal direction. A rack gear 526L is formed in the longitudinal direction.

  On the back surface of the guide member 520L, a guide groove 523L is formed extending in the longitudinal direction and is fitted to a guide piece 522L extending in the vertical direction protruding from the upper left side of the front surface of the frame plate 502, and the guide member 522L guides the guide member 522L. 520L is guided to move up and down. In addition, a guide groove 523R is formed in the longitudinal direction on the back surface of the guide member 520R and is fitted to a guide piece 522R extending in the vertical direction provided in parallel to the guide piece 522L on the upper right side of the front surface of the frame plate 502. The guide member 520R is guided to move up and down by the guide piece 522R.

  On the back surface of the guide member 521L, a guide groove 525L is formed in the longitudinal direction and is fitted to a guide piece 524L extending in the up-down direction protruding from the lower left side of the front surface of the frame plate 502, and the guide member 524L guides the guide member 524L. 521L is guided to move up and down. In addition, a guide groove 525R is formed in the longitudinal direction on the back surface of the guide member 521R and is fitted to a vertically extending guide piece 524R that is provided in parallel with the guide piece 524L at the lower right side of the front surface of the frame plate 502. The guide member 521R is moved and guided in the vertical direction by the guide piece 524R.

  From the outer surface of the guide member 520L, a detection piece 530H (see FIG. 56) detected by the shutter sensor 37H is formed in the longitudinal direction. The shutter sensor 37H is disposed at a position lower than the lower end of the detected piece 530H in a state where the shutter 38H is located at the storage position, and the shutter sensor 37H is moved by moving the shutter 38H from the storage position toward the front position. The detection piece 530H can be detected.

  Further, a detected piece 530L (see FIG. 56) detected by the shutter sensor 37L is formed from the outer surface of the guide member 521R in the longitudinal direction. The shutter sensor 37L is disposed at a position higher than the upper end of the detected piece 530L in a state where the shutter 38L is positioned at the storage position, and the shutter sensor 37L is moved by moving the shutter 38L from the storage position toward the front position. The detection piece 530L can be detected.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the detected pieces 530H and 530L are detected by the shutter sensors 37H and 37L while the shutters 38H and 38L are moving from the storage position toward the front position. In the effect control microcomputer (not shown), when the detection signals of the detected pieces 530H and 530L from the shutter sensors 37H and 37L are not input (shutter sensors 37H and 37L; off), the shutters 38H and 38L are at the initial position. It is determined that it is located at a certain storage position.

  In this embodiment, while the shutters 38H and 38L are moving from the storage position toward the front position, the detection pieces 530H and 530L are detected by the shutter sensors 37H and 37L. When the detection signals of the detected pieces 530H and 530L are input from the shutter sensors 37H and 37L at the position (shutter sensors 37H and 37L; on), the effect control microcomputer (not shown) has the shutters 38H and 37L. May be determined to be located at the storage position.

  Next, a mounting structure of the shutter 38H and the left and right guide members 520L and 520R and the shutter 38L and the left and right guide members 521L and 521R will be described with reference to FIGS.

  The guide members 520L and 520R are attached to the shutter 38H in a state where the left and right attachment pieces 508a and 508b of the shutter 38H are disposed on the front surfaces of the attachment pieces 527a and 527b. On the other hand, the guide members 521L and 521R are attached to the shutter 38L in a state in which the left and right attachment pieces 509a and 509b of the shutter 38L are arranged on the back of the attachment pieces 529a and 529b.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 54 (a), on the left side of the shutter 38H, mounting screws 541a inserted from the back side into mounting holes 540a respectively formed above and below the mounted pieces 527a of the guide member 520L. Is screwed into a screw hole 542a formed in the mounting piece 508a, whereby the guide member 520L is fixed to the left side of the shutter 38H.

  As shown in FIG. 54 (b), on the left side of the shutter 38L, mounting screws 541b inserted from the front side into mounting holes 540b formed on the upper and lower sides of the mounted pieces 529a of the guide member 521L are attached to the mounting pieces. The guide member 521L is fixed to the left side of the shutter 38L by being screwed into the screw hole 542b formed in 509a.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 55 (a), the mounting piece 508b on the right side of the shutter 38H can be inserted into a horizontally elongated slot 550a formed above and below the mounting piece 527b of the guide member 520R. The convex portion 551a protrudes toward the back side, and in a state where the convex portion 551a is fitted into the elongated hole 550a from the front side, the screw hole 552a formed in the convex portion 551a is inserted into the elongated hole 550a. The guide member 520R is attached to the right side of the shutter 38H by screwing the attachment bolt 553a from the back side through the larger washer 554a.

  In other words, the attachment bolt 553a is screwed into the screw hole 552a via the washer 554a, so that the attachment piece 508b is attached to the attachment piece 527b so as not to be detached, but the convex portion 551a is a long hole extending in the left-right direction. Since the inside of 550a is slidable, the guide member 520R is attached to the shutter 38H so as to be movable in the left-right direction. In addition, the vertical width dimension of the long hole 550a is the same dimension as the width dimension (outer diameter) L51 of the convex part 551a, and the left-right width dimension L50 is formed larger than the width dimension (outer diameter) L51 of the convex part 551a. Thus (L50> L51), the guide member 520R is attached to the shutter 38H with some play in the left-right direction.

  Further, the height of the convex portion 551a is slightly longer than the depth of the elongated hole 550a, so that even if the mounting bolt 553a is tightly screwed into the threaded hole 552a, the washer 554a remains in the elongated hole. The guide member 520R is attached to the shutter 38H with a little play because the gap is secured between the washer 554a and the elongated hole 550a peripheral portion without being pressed by the peripheral portion 550a. Nevertheless, it is not fixed by the mounting bolt 553a.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (b), the mounting piece 509b on the right side of the shutter 38L can be inserted into a horizontally elongated slot 550b formed above and below the mounted piece 529b of the guide member 521R. The convex portion 551b protrudes toward the front side, and the convex portion 551b is fitted into the elongated hole 550b from the back side, and the screw hole 552b formed in the convex portion 551b is inserted into the elongated hole 550b. The guide member 521R is attached to the right side of the shutter 38L by screwing the attachment bolt 553b from the front side through the larger washer 554b.

  In other words, the attachment bolt 553b is screwed into the screw hole 552b via the washer 554b, so that the attachment piece 509b is attached to the attachment piece 529b so as not to be detached, but the convex portion 551b is a long hole extending in the left-right direction. Since it is slidable within 550b, the guide member 521R is attached to the shutter 38L so as to be movable in the left-right direction. In addition, the vertical width dimension of the long hole 550b is the same dimension as the width dimension (outer diameter) L53 of the convex part 551b, and the left-right width dimension L52 is formed larger than the width dimension (outer diameter) L53 of the convex part 551b. (L52> L53), the guide member 521R is attached to the shutter 38L with some play left and right.

  Further, the height of the convex portion 551b is slightly longer than the depth of the elongated hole 550b, so that even if the mounting bolt 553b is tightly screwed into the threaded hole 552b, the washer 554b is elongated. The guide member 521R is attached to the shutter 38L with some play because the gap is secured between the washer 554b and the elongated hole 550b peripheral portion without being pressed by the peripheral portion 550b. Nevertheless, it is not fixed by the mounting bolt 553b.

  As described above, the guide members 520L and 520R attached to the shutter 38H and the guide members 521L and 521R attached to the shutter 38L are fixedly attached to the left side guide members 520L and 521L, and the right side The guide members 520R and 521R are attached to the shutters 38H and 38L so as not to move in the vertical direction but to be slightly movable in the horizontal direction. Therefore, even if an error occurs in the accuracy of molding or assembling of the left and right guide members 520L, 520R, 521L, and 521R, this error is caused by the attachment between the upper and lower shutters 38H and 38L and the right guide members 520R and 521R. By being absorbed by play, even if twisting or the like occurs when the left and right guide members 520L, 520R, 521L, and 521R move in the vertical direction, they are not transmitted to the upper and lower shutters 38H and 38L. It is possible to prevent the vertical movement of the upper and lower shutters 38H and 38L from occurring.

  As shown in FIG. 56, the shutter 38H with the guide members 520L and 520R attached downward on the left and right sides is arranged on the upper side of the frame plate 502 with the guide members 520L, 520R is arranged. Further, in the state in which the shutter 38L with the guide members 521L and 521R attached upward on the left and right sides is arranged on the lower side of the frame plate 502, the guide members 521L and 521R are arranged below the left and right sides. The guide members 520L and 520R are respectively arranged on the outer sides in the left-right direction with respect to the guide members 521L and 521R.

  In this way, the pair of upper and lower left and right guide members 520L and 520R and guide members 521L and 521R are juxtaposed on the left and right, respectively, so that the front and rear width of the shutter unit 500 is made as thin as possible as compared with the case where they are arranged in the front and rear direction. Accordingly, the shutters 38H and 38L can be disposed as close as possible to the display unit of the image display device 5.

  The guide members 520L, 520R, 521L, and 521R disposed on the left and right sides of the opening 503 are configured to fit the guide pieces 522L, 522R, 524L, and 524R facing upward and downward in the respective guide grooves 523L, 523R, 525L, and 525R. Thus, the guide is slidable in the vertical direction. Note that the front surfaces of the guide members 520L, 520R, 521L, and 521R are covered with a cover member (not shown), so that they are prevented from being lifted forward.

  The drive rack gears 526H and 526L formed on the guide members 520L and 520R are meshed with the driven pinion gears 565H and 565L disposed on the back surface of the frame plate 502 at the back surface of the frame plate 502, and the driven pinion gears 565H and 565L are , Are provided to be rotatable around rotation shafts 566 and 566 directed in the front-rear direction, and mesh with the driving rack gears 526H and 526L.

  Further, the driven pinion gears 565H and 565L are engaged with the rear side driven gears 567H and 567L engaged with the driving gear 36b fixed to the output shaft 36a of the shutter motors 36H and 36L attached to the rear side of the frame plate 502. Are meshed on the back side.

  Therefore, when the shutter motors 36H and 36L are rotated forward, the driven gears 567H and 567L and the driven pinion gears 565H and 565L are rotationally driven, the guide members 520L and 520R meshing with the gears are moved downward, and the guide members 521L and 521R are moved downward. Move upward. That is, the shutters 38H and 38L move from the storage position toward the front position.

  When the shutter motors 36H and 36L are rotated in the reverse direction, the guide members 520L and 520R are moved upward, the shutter 38H is moved upward from the front position toward the storage position, and the guide members 521L and 521R are moved downward. The shutter 38L moves downward from the front surface position toward the storage position.

  That is, since the shutters 38H and 38L are linked to the shutter motors 36H and 36L, which are separate drive sources, via gears, respectively, as shown in FIGS. Can be individually or interlocked from the storage position to the front position or from the front position to the storage position. In this embodiment, the upper and lower shutters 38H and 38L can be moved by separate shutter motors 36H and 36L, respectively, but the upper and lower shutters 38H and 38L are moved to the front by a single shutter motor. An interlocking mechanism that interlocks from the position to the storage position or from the storage position to the front surface position may be provided so that both shutters can be interlocked by a single shutter motor.

  As described above, the shutter unit 500 includes the shutters 38H and 38L as the movable objects, the guide members 520L and 521L as the first moving bodies that support the shutters 38H and 38L from the left side, the shutters 38H and the shutters. Guide members 520R and 521R as second moving bodies that support 38L from the right side, guide pieces 522L and 524L and guide grooves 523L and 525L as first guide means for moving and guiding the guide members 520L and 521L, and guide pieces Guide pieces 522R, 524R and guide grooves as second guide means that are provided parallel to 522L, 524L and move and guide the guide members 520R, 521R in the same direction (vertical direction) as the guide direction of the guide members 520L, 521L. 523R, 525R and guide members 520L, 521L, 520R Shutter motors 36H and 36L, driving gear 36b, driven gears 567H and 567L, driven pinion gears 565H and 565L, driving rack gears 526H and 526L, guide members 520L and 521L, and shutter 38H as driving means for driving both 521R in the vertical direction , The mounting screws 541a and 541b, the screw holes 542a and 542b, and the guide members 520R and 521R as well as the shutter 38H and the shutter 38H. 38L and convex portions 551a, 551b, elongated holes 550a, 550b, mounting bolts 553a, 553b, screw holes 552a, 552b as second connecting means for connecting the left and right directions in a lateral direction orthogonal to the up-down direction. Consists of

  The shutters 38H and 38L configured as described above are moved and guided by the guide members 520L and 521L guided by the guide pieces 522L and 524L and the guide grooves 523L and 525L, and the guide pieces 522R and 524R and the guide grooves 523R and 525R. By being connected to and supported by the guide members 520R and 521R, misalignment and backlash during movement are unlikely to occur. In addition, when an error occurs in the accuracy of molding and assembling of the shutters 38H and 38L, the guide pieces and the guide grooves, and the drive timing with the left and right guide members, the shutters 38H and 38L are in contact with the guide members 520L and 521L. In addition, a large positional shift is prevented and the error is absorbed by the relative movement with respect to the guide members 520R and 521R. Therefore, the shutters 38H and 38L can be moved smoothly without rattling. .

  In the shutter unit 500, the state where the upper and lower shutters 38H and 38L are positioned at the storage position is set as an initial position in drive control by an effect control microcomputer (not shown). When a projection operation command for the shutters 38H and 38L is output from the effect control microcomputer (not shown), a drive command in the projection operation direction is transmitted to the shutter motors 36H and 36L formed of stepping motors. As a result, each shutter motor 36H, 36L starts a driving operation of a preset number of steps. As a result, the shutters 38H and 38L perform a protruding operation to move toward the front surface position.

  When a retracting operation command for the shutters 38H and 38L is output from the effect control microcomputer (not shown), a driving command in the retracting operation direction is transmitted to the shutter motors 36H and 36L that are stepping motors. As a result, each shutter motor 36H, 36L starts a driving operation of a preset number of steps.

  When the shutters 38H and 38L reach the storage positions, the detection signals of the detected pieces 530H and 530L from the shutter sensors 37H and 37L are interrupted (shutter sensors 37H and 37L; off), and the shutter motors 36H and 36L are retracted. The driving of the operation is stopped.

  Further, the effect control microcomputer (not shown) controls the driving of the shutter 38, for example, the gaming state is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b with a specific display result (big hit symbol). The game state transitions such as when the game ball enters the variable baseball device 15 when the game ball enters the high base state where the game ball easily starts and wins, when the game game state transitions to the big hit game state. It may be performed at an appropriate timing, such as when various effects (such as reach effects) are executed on the display unit of the image display device 5 or when the operation button 50 is operated.

  Furthermore, the upper and lower shutters 38 are not only arranged at either the front position or the storage position while being controlled in each gaming state or when the image display device 5 is producing effects, but also are stored in the front position and the storage position. You may perform control which repeats an up-and-down movement between positions.

  The production control microcomputer (not shown) causes the shutter motors 36H and 36L to perform a predetermined initial operation at a predetermined timing such as when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, thereby confirming the operation. Yes. In this initial operation, for example, the shutter motors 36H and 36L are operated to protrude and retract, and it is confirmed whether the shutter sensors 37H and 37L are normally turned on / off.

  In addition, when the shutter control motors 36H and 36L are operated in a projecting manner, for example, the effect control microcomputer (not shown) detects the shutter sensors 37H and 37L from the shutter sensors 37H and 37L. When the detection signal is not input, a predetermined retry operation is performed, and when the detection signal from the shutter sensors 37H and 37L is not input, the abnormal state is determined.

  In this retry operation, for example, the shutter motors 36H and 36L are operated by a predetermined number of steps in the retracting operation direction and by a predetermined number of steps in the retracting operation direction that is greater than the protruding operation direction. When it is determined that the state is abnormal, the fact may be notified by display on the image display device 5, sound, LED, or the like, or without notification, the image display device 5 may be substantially the same as the shutters 38H and 38L. You may make it produce | present by displaying the moving image which a shutter operate | moves.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on when the upper and lower shutters 38H and 38L are not arranged at the storage position which is the initial position, and an effect control microcomputer (not shown) is applied to the shutter motors 36H and 36L. By performing the initial operation, a detection signal is input from the shutter sensors 37H and 37L when power is supplied to the shutter sensors 37H and 37L, and it is impossible to specify the position where the shutter 38H is located and an error occurs. There is no possibility that the shutter motors 36H and 36L are driven more than necessary and a load is applied to the shutter motors 36H and 36L and various guide members.

  Further, even if an error occurs in the accuracy of molding and assembling of the left and right rack gears 525H and 525LR, this error is absorbed by the play of the mounting portion between the shutters 38H and 38L and the right guide members 520R and 521R. ing. Therefore, when the guide members 520L, 520R, 521L, and 521R move through the guide pieces 522L, 522R, 525L, and 525R formed on the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the frame plate 502, the upper and lower shutters 38H and 38L are moved. Since no twisting or the like occurs, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a lifting / lowering operation failure of the shutters 38H and 38L.

  In the present embodiment, the guide member 520R, 521R or the shutter 38 is provided in one of the left and right directions, which is the relative movement direction, and the front-rear direction perpendicular to the up-down direction, which is the guide direction of the guide members 520R, 521R. Elongate holes 550a and 550b serving as connection openings that open toward the other side, and provided in the other side, extending in the left-right direction as the relative movement direction and in the front-rear direction perpendicular to the up-down direction as the guide direction of the guide members 520R and 521R. The second connecting means is composed of the convex portions 551a and 551b as the connecting insertion portions that are provided and inserted into the elongated holes 550a and 550b, and the elongated holes 550a and 550b are inserted into the elongated holes 550a and 550b. By forming the convex portions 551a and 551b as long holes having left and right width dimensions (L50 and L52) that can move in the left and right direction, the long holes 5 Since the axes of 0a and 550b and the convex portions 551a and 551b are directed in the front-rear direction, for example, even if the distance between the shutters 38H and 38L and the guide members 520R and 521R is not forcibly increased, the shutters 38H and 38L Connection and release operations with the guide members 520R and 521R can be easily performed from the front side.

  In addition, a connecting concave portion that opens toward the other is formed on one facing surface of the guide members 520R, 521R or the shutter 38, and the other facing surface is extended and connected in the left-right direction, which is a relative movement direction. The connection convex part which fits into a crevice is formed, and the connection crevice may constitute the 2nd connection means which has the depth size which can move the connection convex part fitted to this connection crevice in the left-right direction, In this case, it is possible to connect the guide members 520R and 521R to the shutter 38 so as to be relatively movable in the left-right direction and not to be relatively movable in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction simply by fitting the connection convex portion to the connection concave portion. it can.

  In the present embodiment, the right and left right guide members 520R and 521R are attached to the upper and lower shutters 38H and 38L so as to be free of movement in the vertical direction and movable in the horizontal direction. However, it may be mounted with play that is movable not only in the left-right direction but also in the up-down direction. By doing so, an error in the up-down direction is caused in the accuracy of molding and assembling of the left and right rack gears 525H and 525L. Even if it occurs, this error can be absorbed by the play of the mounting portion between the shutters 38H and 38L and the right guide members 520R and 521R.

  Further, the right guide members 520R and 521R may be attached to the upper and lower shutters 38H and 38L with a play that is immovable in the horizontal direction and movable in the vertical direction. What is necessary is just to arrange | position 550a, 550b toward the up-down direction.

  In this embodiment, the elongated holes 550a and 550b are provided on the guide members 520R and 521R side, and the convex portions 551a and 551b that can be inserted into the elongated holes 550a and 550b are provided on the shutters 38H and 38L. The long holes 550a and 550b may be provided on the 38th side, and the convex portions 551a and 551b may be provided on the guide member 520R and 521R side.

  Further, in this embodiment, only the right guide members 520R and 521R are attached to the shutters 38H and 38L with a play that is not movable in the left-right direction and movable in the vertical direction. In contrast, only the left guide members 520L and 521L may be attached with a play that is not movable in the left-right direction and movable in the vertical direction, or the left and right guide members 520L with respect to the shutters 38H and 38L. , 520R, 521L, and 521R may be provided with a play that is immovable in the left-right direction and movable in the up-down direction. In this case, the play of the left and right guide members 520L, 521L, 520R, and 521R with respect to the shutters 38H and 38L, that is, the relative movement allowable amount may be made larger in one of the left and right than the other.

  Further, since the upper and lower shutters 38H and 38L are driven according to the effect display by the image display device 5 controlled mainly by the effect control microcomputer (not shown), for example, the upper and lower shutters 38H and 38L are operated. If it is not driven for some reason, normally, nothing is displayed in the screen area where the shutters 38H and 38L are arranged on the front side, which gives the player a sense of incongruity. For example, the effect of driving the shutters 38H and 38L In the case where the shutters 38H and 38L are driven even when the shutters 38H and 38L are not driven by performing control to always display images imitating the shutters 38H and 38L in the rear area of the shutter 38 when executing Since the same production screen can be provided, the player does not feel uncomfortable.

  In the shutter unit 500 of the above-described embodiment, the shutter shutters 38H and 38L are made non-translucent, and an image displayed on the display unit on the back side cannot be viewed through the shutters 38H and 38L. 38H and 38L may be formed of a light-transmitting material so that an image displayed on the display unit on the back side can be viewed through the shutters 38H and 38L.

  In the shutter unit 500 of the above embodiment, the guide members 520L, 520R, 521L, and 521R are disposed on the left and right sides of the display unit, respectively, but may be disposed on the front side of the display unit. Alternatively, it may be arranged on the back side of the image display device 5.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 100 determines whether the contents of the program are valid. After executing the security check process, which is a process for checking, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 103 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 103 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S3). After initialization of the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) is performed (step S4), the RAM is accessible (Step S5). In interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value of the specific register (I register) (1 byte) built in the CPU 103 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms the state of an output signal (clear signal) of a clear switch (not shown) (for example, mounted on the power supply board 16) input via the input port (step S6). If ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 103 executes normal initialization processing (steps S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped (Step S7). If it is confirmed that such protection processing has not been performed, the CPU 103 executes initialization processing. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process.

  After confirming that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 103 checks the data in the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 103 performs a game state restoration process (steps S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Process). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 101 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 102) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing in steps S41 and S42, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain as they are. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time reduction flag, etc.), and the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer) ), A portion in which data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S43). Then, the process proceeds to step S14. In this embodiment, the CPU 103 notifies the first reserved memory number based on the first reserved memory number counter, the second reserved memory number counter, and the total reserved memory number counter stored in the backup RAM in the process of step S43. The command, the second reserved memory number notification command, and the special figure reserved memory number notification command are also transmitted to the effect control board 80, so that when the power supply is restored, the first reserved memory number display area 5D and the second reserved memory can be quickly displayed. Accurate display of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number can be started in the memory number display area 5U.

  In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data, but only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the game state restoration process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 103 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). The RAM clear process initializes predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number value MR5 for determining a normal map display result) to 0, but any value or a predetermined value is determined. You may make it initialize to the value currently set. Alternatively, the entire area of the RAM 102 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, count value data for a counter for generating a random display value MR5 for determining a normal display result) may be left as it is. Further, the initial address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 101 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing of steps S11 and S12, for example, various counters such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, a variation special figure designation buffer in the game control buffer setting unit 155, and a special figure in the game control flag setting unit 152 Initial values are set for the process flag, big hit flag, small hit flag, probability variation flag, hourly flag, and the like.

  In addition, the CPU 103 initializes a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 11 is mounted). An initialization designation command (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 100 has executed initialization processing). Is also transmitted to the sub-board (step S13). For example, when receiving the initialization designation command, the effect control CPU 120 performs an initial screen display for informing that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, that is, initialization notification in the image display device 5.

  Further, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initially setting the random number circuit 503 (step S14). For example, the CPU 103 performs setting according to the random number circuit setting program to cause the random number circuit 104 to update the value of the random number value MR1.

  In step S15, the CPU 103 sets a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 2 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S16). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, the interrupt enabled state is set. Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, or a random number for determining whether to reach when it is not a big hit, The random number update process is a process for updating the count value of a counter for generating a display random number. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is an initial value of a count value of a counter (ordinary symbol determination random number generation counter) for generating a random number MR5 or the like for determining whether or not to win a normal symbol. It is a random number for determining. A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 100 is a game device such as an image display device 5, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the game machine. In the process of controlling, the process of sending a command signal to cause another microcomputer to control, or the game device control process), the count value of the random number for determining the normal symbol is one round (the random number for determining the normal symbol) When the number of values between the minimum value and the maximum value that can be taken is increased), an initial value is set in the counter.

  When a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 103 executes a timer interrupt process in steps S20 to S27 shown in FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 29 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal has been output (whether or not it has been turned on) (step S20). ). The power-off signal is output, for example, when the power monitoring unit (circuit) 62 mounted on the power supply board 16 detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the power-off detection process, when the CPU 103 detects that the power-off signal is output, the CPU 103 executes a power supply stop process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, the state of detection signals input from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 by executing predetermined switch processing. Is determined (step S21). Subsequently, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed by executing a predetermined main-side error process, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (step) S23).

  Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as random number values MR1 to MR5 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol is processed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of the display operation in the display device 4B, setting of the opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process, a normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED, etc.) on the normal symbol display 20 by executing the normal symbol process, so that the variable display of the normal symbol and the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B are movable. Enables setting of the tilting movement of the blade. After executing the normal symbol process, the CPU 103 transmits a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (step S27). As an example, in the command control process, in response to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, among the output ports included in the I / O 105, effect control After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the board 12, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. By changing the state to the off state, the presentation control command can be transmitted based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 28 as the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). 30 and 31 are flowcharts showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S101. In the start winning determination process shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, the CPU 103 first reads the input port data stored in a predetermined input port register (step S201 in FIG. 30). Here, the input port register is a register in which, for example, a bit value indicating an input state of an external signal at an input port included in the I / O 105 is stored. In this embodiment, the input port data stored in the bit number [0] of the input port register is the input state (OFF / ON) of the first start winning signal that becomes the detection signal transmitted from the first start port switch 22A. ) And the input port data stored in the bit number [1] of the input port register is the input state (OFF / OFF) of the second start winning signal that becomes the detection signal of the game ball transmitted from the second start port switch 22B. ON).

  It is determined whether or not the bit value [1] of the input port register read in step S201 is “1” (step S202). At this time, if the bit value is “1” (step S202; Yes), the second start winning determination count value that is the stored value of the second start winning determination counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 is, for example, Update so as to count up by adding 1 (step S203). On the other hand, when it is determined as “0” in step S202 (step S202; No), the second start winning determination counter is cleared and the stored value is initialized to “0”. (Step S204).

  After executing one of the processes in steps S203 and S204, it is determined whether or not the bit value in the bit number [0] of the input port register read in step S201 is “1” (step S205). At this time, if the bit value is “1” (step S205; Yes), the first start winning determination count value that is the stored value of the first starting winning determination counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 is, for example, It is updated so as to count up by adding 1 (step S206). On the other hand, when it is determined as “0” in step S205 (step S205; No), the first start winning determination counter is cleared and the stored value is initialized to “0”. (Step S207).

  After executing one of the processes in steps S206 and S207, it is determined whether or not the first start winning determination count value has reached a predetermined determination value (for example, “2”) predetermined as a winning determination value. (Step S208). At this time, if the first start winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value (step S208; Yes), the starting port buffer value that is the stored value of the starting port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is “1” is set (step S209). Further, the first start winning determination counter is cleared and the count value is initialized to “0” (step S210).

  If the first start winning determination count value has not reached the winning determination value in step S208 (step S208; No), a valid game ball winning in the first start winning opening is detected by the first start opening switch 22A. In response to this, it is determined whether or not the second start winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value (step S211). At this time, if the second start winning determination count value does not reach the winning determination value (step S211; No), a valid game ball winning to the second start winning opening is detected by the second start opening switch 22B. In response to the absence, the start winning determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if the second start winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value (step S211; Yes), the start port buffer value is set to “2” (step S212). Further, the second start winning determination counter is cleared and the count value is initialized to “0” (step S213).

  After executing one of the processes of Steps S210 and S213, the CPU 103 reads the pending storage number count value corresponding to the start port buffer value (Step S214). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the first reserved memory number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 is read, and the starting port buffer value is When it is “2”, the second reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 is read. Then, it is determined whether or not the read value in step S214 has reached a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) (step S215 in FIG. 31). At this time, if the read value in step S214 does not reach the upper limit value, the starting condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is effectively established. For example, if it is determined in step S208 shown in FIG. 30 that the first start winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value and then it is determined in step S215 that the read value has not reached the upper limit value, The first start condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the one special symbol display device 4A and the variable display of the decorative symbol is established. When it is determined in step S211 shown in FIG. 30 that the second start winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value and then it is determined in step S215 that the read value has not reached the upper limit value, The second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the two special symbol display device 4B and the variable display of the decorative symbol is established.

  Thus, when the read value has not reached the upper limit value in step S215 (step S215; No), 1 is added to the reserved storage number count value corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S216). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, 1 is added to the first reserved memory number count value, and when the starting port buffer value is “2”, 1 is added to the second reserved memory number count value. Then, the CPU 103 adds 1 to the total pending storage number count value that is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter that indicates the total pending storage number that is the total value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number ( Step S217).

  Subsequent to the processing of step S217, the CPU 103, among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter, the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the variation pattern Numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for type determination is extracted (step S218). Numeric data indicating each random value extracted in this way is set as reserved data at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure reservation storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value, whereby each random value is stored (step S219). . For example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 is set in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, while when the start port buffer value is “2”, Numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are set in the second special figure storage unit 151B.

  After the random number value is stored in step S219, the reserved memory number notification command corresponding to the reserved memory number count value corresponding to the starting port buffer value updated in step S216 is transmitted to the effect control board 12. Setting is performed (step S220). For example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, the storage address of the first reserved memory number notification command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, and the first reserved memory is stored. Configure settings for sending number notification commands. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is “2”, the storage address of the second reserved storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, and 2. Setting for transmitting a pending storage count notification command. The reserved memory number notification command set in this way is performed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 28 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. Is transmitted.

  After the setting in step S220, for example, the storage address of the reserved storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the effect control board 12 by storing it in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. Settings for transmitting the number notification command are performed (step S221). The reserved memory number notification command set in this way is performed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 28 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. Is transmitted.

  When the read value has reached the upper limit value in step S215 (step S215; Yes), after executing the process of step S221, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is “1” or “2”. Determination is made (step S222). At this time, if the start port buffer value is “1” (step S222; “1”), whether or not the time reduction flag is set (step S225) and the special figure process flag is 4 or more, that is, a big hit It is determined whether or not the control or the small hit control is being performed (step S226). If both are “No”, the process proceeds to step S227, and the effect determination process at the time of winning is performed. On the other hand, if either one is “Yes”, the start port buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to “0” without going through Step S227 (Step S228). The process proceeds to step S211 shown.

  On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is “2” (step S222; “2”), the process proceeds to step S223 unconditionally, and after performing the winning effect determination process shown in FIG. Is cleared, the stored value is initialized to “0” (step S224), and the start winning determination process is terminated.

  In this embodiment, when the processes of steps S225 and S226 are executed, and there is an effective start winning at the first start winning opening, the gaming state is the normal state or the latent probability changing state. In some cases, the winning effect determination process in step S227 is executed only during the period when the big hit or the small hit control is not executed, so that the notice effect is performed by the hold storage display by the effect control board 12. It should be noted that the process may not be shifted to step S227 only when the game state is a big hit game state, and may be made to move to step S227 to execute the winning effect determination process when the game state is a small hit game state.

  Further, in this embodiment, when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B detect the start winning of the game ball that is effective at the same time, by the processing executed within 2 milliseconds, A process based on the fact that both of the switches have detected a start winning of a valid game ball is executed. That is, when it is determined in step S208 shown in FIG. 30 that the first start winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value, the processing in steps S209, S210, and S214 shown in FIG. After executing the processing of steps S215 to S221 shown in FIG. 30, in response to the fact that the start port buffer value is “1” in step S222, the processing of step S228 is executed, and then in step S211 shown in FIG. Proceed to processing. When it is determined in step S211 that the second start winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value, the processing in steps S212 to S214 shown in FIG. 30 is executed, and then steps S215 to S221 shown in FIG. After executing the above process, the process of step S224 is executed in response to the start port buffer value being “2” in step S222, and then the start winning determination process is terminated. Thereby, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B detect the start winning of the game balls that are effective at the same time, the processing based on the detection of both effective start winnings can be completed reliably.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the winning effect determination process in step S223 or step S227. In the winning effect determination process, first, the CPU 103 first stores the random number MR1 stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A or the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B and the normal state shown in the special figure display result determination table 130 in step S219. Or it compares with the jackpot judgment value corresponding to a time-short state, and it is confirmed whether they correspond (step S420). In this embodiment, at the timing of starting the variation of the special symbol and the production symbol, whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol normal processing described later, determining the type of big hit or changing the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting processing Separately, at the timing when the game ball starts to win at the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening, before the variable display based on the start winning starts, By executing the effect determination process, it is confirmed in advance which variation pattern type is to be used. By doing so, the variation pattern type is specified in advance before the variation display of the effect symbol is executed, and as described later, based on the determination result at the time of winning, the effect control CPU 120 performs super reach or A holding notice effect is executed in which a big hit is announced by changing the display mode of the corresponding holding display.

  If the random value MR1 does not match the jackpot determination value in the normal state or the short time state (No in step S420), the CPU 103 checks whether or not a probability change flag indicating that the gaming state is a probability change state is set. (Step S421). If the probability variation flag is set, the CPU 103 compares the random number MR1 with the jackpot determination value corresponding to the probability variation state in the special figure display result determination table 130, and confirms whether or not they match (step S422). ).

  If the random value MR1 does not match the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change (No in step S422), the CPU 103 compares the random value MR1 with the small hit determination value in the special figure display result determination table 130, and they match. It is confirmed whether or not to perform (step S423).

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the small hit determination value (No in step S423), the CPU 103 performs a process of determining the current gaming state (step S424). In this embodiment, in step S424, the CPU 103 determines whether the gaming state is a normal state, a high base state in which the time reduction flag is set, or a latent probability changing state in which only the probability changing flag is set. Determine. In addition, the CPU 103 specifies the total number of pending storage.

  Then, the CPU 103 sets a deviation variation pattern type determination table according to the determination result of step S424 (step S425). Specifically, if the CPU 103 determines that the gaming state is the normal state, the CPU 103 sets a variation pattern type determination table for detachment (normal time) 133A shown in FIG. When it is determined that the gaming state is the high base state, the deviation variation pattern type determination table (high base) 133B shown in FIG. 12B is set. When it is determined that the gaming state is the latent probability changing state, the deviation variation pattern type determination table (latent probability changing) 133C shown in FIG. 12C is set.

  On the other hand, if the random value MR1 matches the small hit determination value (Yes in step S423), the CPU 103 sets the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132B shown in FIG. 11B (step S426).

  When the random value MR1 matches the jackpot determination value in step S420 or step S422, the CPU 103 compares the random number MR2 stored together with the random value MR1 and the jackpot type determination table 131 to determine whether the jackpot type is the jackpot type. Is determined to be “non-probable variation big hit”, “probable variation big hit” or “suddenly probable big hit” (step S427), and a big hit variation pattern type determination table is set (step S428).

  Next, the CPU 103 uses the variation pattern type determination table set in steps S425, S426, and S428, the jackpot type specified in step S427, and the random number value MR3 stored together with the random number values MR1 and MR2. The pattern type is determined (step S429).

  Then, the CPU 103 performs a process of setting the determined variation pattern type in the winning determination result designation command (step S430). For example, if it is determined that “no reach is reached” in step S429 when there is a start winning at the first start winning opening, a determination result designation command at the time of winning composed of MODE data “94 (H)” is set. Processing to set “00 (H)” to the EXT data is performed. If it is determined in step S429 that “super-reach is lost”, a process of setting “01 (H)” to the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command composed of MODE data “94 (H)” is performed. Do. If it is determined in step S429 that “super reach big hit”, processing for setting “02 (H)” in the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command composed of MODE data “94 (H)” is performed. Do. Also, if there is a start winning at the second start winning opening, if it is determined as “non-reach” in step S429, the determination result at the time of winning constituted by MODE data “94 (H)” is designated. Processing for setting “03 (H)” in the EXT data of the command is performed. If it is determined in step S429 that “super-reach is lost”, a process of setting “04 (H)” to the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command composed of MODE data “94 (H)” is performed. Do. If it is determined in step S429 that “super reach big hit”, processing for setting “05 (H)” to the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command composed of MODE data “94 (H)” is performed. Do. In addition, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the determined variation pattern type in the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command, and performs transmission setting of the winning determination result designation command in which the EXT data is set (S430). . The winning determination result designation command for which these transmission settings have been made is performed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. Is transmitted.

  After executing the start winning determination process in step S101 shown in FIG. 29, the CPU 103 performs each of the following steps S110 to S120 in accordance with the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. Execute the process.

  The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol are based on the presence / absence of reserved data stored in the first special symbol reservation storage unit 151A and the second special diagram reservation storage unit 151B. It is determined whether or not to start the special game using the display device 4B. In the special symbol normal process, whether or not the variable symbol display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set to “big hit” or “small hit” based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. It is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, in response to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, the confirmed special symbol (big hit symbol, the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B) Either a small hit symbol or a lost symbol) is set.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. This variation pattern setting process includes a process for determining the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types based on the result of determining whether the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. Corresponding to the determination result of the pattern type, processing for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns is included.

  The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. The special symbol variation process includes a process for performing setting for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure For example, every time the special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed, the special diagram variation timer value, which is the stored value in the special diagram variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153, is subtracted or incremented by one. Regardless of whether the game is a special game using the first special graphic by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special game using the second special graphic by the second special symbol display device 4B, a common timer is used. The elapsed time is measured. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached a special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. As described above, the special symbol variation process in step S112 is performed by the first special symbol display device 4A using the first special symbol in the special symbol game or the second special symbol display device 4B. It suffices if it is a process for controlling the variation of the special symbol in the special figure game using the game by a common processing routine. When the elapsed time since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B stops the change of the special symbol, and the fixed special symbol which is the variable symbol display result is stopped and displayed. A process for setting is included. Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag or the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is on. When the big hit flag is on, the special process flag value is set to “ Update to 4 ". When the small hit flag is on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. Further, when both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are OFF, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The big hit release pre-processing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit release pre-processing includes a process for starting the execution of the round in the big hit gaming state and setting the big winning opening to the open state based on the fact that the variable display result becomes “big hit”, etc. include. At this time, for example, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened may be set in accordance with whether the big hit type is “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change”. As an example, when the big hit type is controlled to 15 rounds big hit state corresponding to “non-probability change” or “probability change”, the upper limit of the period in which the big winning opening is opened is set to “29 seconds”. In addition to the setting, the number of times of opening of the big winning opening, which is the number of round games executed, is set to “15 times”. On the other hand, when the big hit type is controlled to be “surprise” and is controlled to the two round big hit state, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “0.5 seconds”. At the same time, the number of times of opening of the big prize opening, which is the number of round games executed, is set to “2 times”.

  The big hit release processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In the big hit opening process, the winning prize opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is in the open state, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. The process etc. which determine whether it became the timing which returns to a closed state from an open state are included. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, a process for stopping the supply of the solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door may be executed.

  The big hit release post-processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-hit opening process, the process of determining whether or not the number of rounds in which the winning opening is in the open state has reached the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening, or the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening has been reached. In some cases, a process for performing a setting for transmitting an end designation command is included.

  The big hit end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In the jackpot end process, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed by an effect device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 or the like. Processing that waits until time elapses and processing that performs various settings for controlling to a probable change state and a short time state corresponding to the jackpot type are included.

  The small hit pre-release process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This pre-opening process for small hits is a setting for starting the execution of variable winning action in the small hit game state and opening the big winning opening based on the fact that the variable display result is “small hit”, etc. The processing to perform is included. At this time, for example, in response to the variable display result being “small hit”, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “0.5 seconds”, and the big winning opening in the variable winning operation is set. The number of times of opening may be set to “twice”.

  The small hit releasing process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In the small hit opening process, the process for measuring the elapsed time since the big prize opening is in the open state, and the timing for returning the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time, etc. The process etc. which determine whether or not were included are included. When returning the big prize opening to the closed state, a process for stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door may be executed.

  The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. In this small hit end process, there is a waiting time corresponding to a period during which the presentation operation for informing the end of the small hit gaming state is executed by the presentation device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 or the like. Processing that waits until the time has passed is included. Here, when the small hit gaming state is finished, the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued without changing the state of the probability change flag and the short time flag.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol normal process executed in step S110 of FIG. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 33, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure is “0” (step S231). For example, in the process of step S231, the game control counter setting unit 154 reads the second reserved memory number count value stored in the second reserved memory number counter, and determines whether or not the read value is “0”. That's fine.

  When the number of reserved figures stored in the special figure game using the second special figure is other than “0” in step S231 (step S231; No), the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B corresponds to the reserved number “1”. As the stored data, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type are read out (step S232). . The numerical data read at this time may be stored in a random number buffer for variation, for example, and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S232, for example, by subtracting and updating the second reserved memory number count value, the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure is updated to be decremented by one. In the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B, reservation data indicating random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than the reservation number “1” (for example, entries corresponding to the reservation numbers “2” to “4”) are stored. One entry is shifted upward (step S233).

  Then, transmission setting of the second reserved memory number notification command based on the second reserved memory number count value after the subtraction update is performed (step S233 +). Further, in the process of step S233, the game control counter setting unit 154 may update the total pending storage number count value stored in the total pending storage number counter by one. At this time, the value of the variation special figure designation buffer is updated to “2” (step S234).

  When the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure is “0” in step S231 (step S231; Yes), the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure is “0”. It is determined whether or not (step S235). For example, in the process of step S235, the game control counter setting unit 154 reads the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter, and determines whether or not the read value is “0”. That's fine. As described above, the process of step S235 is executed when it is determined in step S231 that the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure is “0”, and the first special figure is used. It is determined whether or not the number of stored special game games is “0”. Therefore, execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

  When the number of reserved figures stored in the special figure game using the first special figure is other than “0” in step S235 (step S235; No), the first special figure reserved memory unit 151A corresponds to the reserved number “1”. As the stored data, numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type are read out (step S236). . The numerical data read at this time may be stored in a random number buffer for variation, for example, and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S236, for example, by updating the first reserved memory number count value by subtracting 1 and updating it, the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure is updated so as to be reduced by 1. In the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, reservation data indicating random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than the reservation number “1” (for example, entries corresponding to the reservation numbers “2” to “4”) are stored. One entry is shifted upward (step S237).

  Then, transmission setting of the first reserved memory number notification command based on the first reserved memory number count value after the subtraction update is performed (step S237 +). Further, in the process of step S237, the game control counter setting unit 154 may update the total pending storage number count value stored in the total pending storage number counter by one. At this time, the value of the variation special figure designation buffer is updated to “1” (step S238).

  After executing any of the processes of steps S234 and S238, it is determined whether to display the special figure variable display result, which is the variable symbol display result, as “big hit”, “small hit”, or “losing”. As the usage table, the special figure display result determination table 130 is selected and set (step S239). The CPU 103 refers to the special figure display result determination table 130 set in this way, so that the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for variation is “big hit” or “small”. Whether to display the special figure display result as "big hit", "small hit", or "lose" depending on which of the decision values assigned to each special figure display result of "Bon" or "Lose" Is determined (step S240). At this time, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result determined in step S240 is “big hit” (step S241).

  If it is determined in step S241 that it is a “hit” (step S241; Yes), the big win flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (step S242). At this time, the big hit type determination table 131 is selected and set as a use table for determining the big hit type as one of a plurality of types (step S243). By referring to the big hit type determination table 131 set in this way, the numerical data indicating the big hit type determination random value MR2 stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is “non-probability change”, “probability change”, “surprise change”. Depending on which of the determined values assigned to each jackpot type is matched, it is determined whether the jackpot type is “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change” (step S244). Here, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “2” in the process of step S234, the decision value is not assigned to the big hit type of “surprise” in the big hit type decision table 131. Therefore, the jackpot type is not determined to be “surprising”. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value which is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (step S245), the determined jackpot type Remember. As an example, if the big hit type is “non-probable change”, the big hit type buffer value may be “0”, “probable change” may be “1”, and “surprise” may be “2”.

  When it is determined in step S241 that it is not “big hit” (step S241; No), it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is “small hit” (step S246). When it is determined that the game is “small hit” (step S246; Yes), the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (step S247).

  If it is determined in step S246 that the game is not “small hit” (step S246; No), or after performing any of the processes in steps S245 and S247, whether to control the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. A determined special symbol is set in accordance with the result of the prior determination as to whether or not, and further, the determination result of the jackpot type when the jackpot game state is set (step S248). As an example, when it is determined in step S246 that the special figure display result is not “small hit”, a lost symbol is obtained corresponding to the pre-determined result indicating that the special figure display result is “lost”. The special symbol indicating the symbol “−” is set as the confirmed special symbol. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S246 that the special figure display result is “small hit”, the small figure corresponding to the pre-determined result indicating that the special figure display result is “small hit”. The special symbol indicating the number “2” as the symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. When it is determined in step S241 that the special figure display result is “big hit”, the big hit symbols “1”, “3”, “7” are determined according to the big hit type determination result in step S244. Any of the special symbols indicating the numbers "" is set as the confirmed special symbol. That is, according to the determination result that the big hit type is “non-probable change”, the special symbol indicating the number “3” that becomes the non-probable big hit symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. Further, according to the determination result that the jackpot type is “probability change”, the special symbol indicating the number “7” that becomes the probability change big hit symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. In accordance with the determination result that the big hit type is “accuracy”, the special symbol indicating the number of the big hit symbol “1” is set as the confirmed special symbol.

  After the confirmed special symbol is set in step S248, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S249), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. . In step S235, when the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure is “0” (step S235; Yes), after performing a predetermined demonstration display setting (step S250), the special symbol is set. Normal processing ends. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is effect control from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not transmission to the substrate 12 has been completed. At this time, if the transmission has been completed, the demonstration display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is terminated.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process executed in step S111 of FIG. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 34, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S261). If the big hit flag is on (step S261; Yes), the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A is selected and set as a use table for determining the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types (step S262). ). Further, for example, by reading the jackpot type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155, it is specified whether the jackpot type is “non-probable change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change” (step S263). ).

  When the big hit flag is off in step S261 (step S261; No), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is on (step S264). If the small hit flag is on (step S264; Yes), the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132B is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of types of variation pattern types ( Step S265).

  When the small hit flag is off in step S264 (step S264; No), for example, by determining whether or not the time reduction flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is on, the probability variation state or time reduction is determined. In the state, it is determined whether or not the vehicle is in the high base where the time reduction control or the high opening control is performed (step S266). At this time, if the gaming state is not in the high base (step S266; No), the gaming state is determined by, for example, determining whether or not the probability variation flag provided in the gaming control flag setting unit 152 is on. It is determined whether or not the latent probability changing state that is in the probability changing state is not in the high base (step S267).

  If the game state is not in the latent probability change in step S267 (step S267; No), the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) is used as a use table for determining one of a plurality of variation pattern types. 133A is selected and set (step S268). Further, when the gaming state is in the high base in step S266 (step S266; Yes), the lost variation pattern type determination table (high Base) 133B is selected and set (step S269). If the gaming state is changing the latent probability in step S267 (step S267; Yes), the lost variation pattern type determination table (latent probability changing in progress) is used as a use table for determining one of a plurality of variation pattern types. ) 133C is selected and set (step S270).

  After executing any of the processes of steps S263, S265, and S268 to S270, for example, based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type stored in the random number buffer for variation or the like, By referring to the set variation pattern type determination table, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S271). Here, in the process of step S271, the variation pattern type of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A based on the establishment of the first start condition is determined. Whether or not to determine the variation pattern type of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied. First, using the numerical data indicating the common random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type updated by a common random counter or the like, the variation pattern type may be determined as one of a plurality of types by a common processing module. it can. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the variation pattern type may not be extracted at the time of starting winning when the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening is detected. For example, it may be extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154 when the process of step S271 is executed.

  After the variation pattern type is determined in step S271, the loss variation pattern determination table 134A and the hit variation pattern determination are performed depending on whether the special figure display result is “lost”, “big hit”, or “small hit”. One of the tables 134B is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns (step S272). Subsequently, the variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types by referring to the variation pattern determination table set in step S272 based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern (step S273). The numerical data indicating the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern may be extracted from the random number circuit 104, the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, or the like when the process of step S273 is executed, or the first start winning prize The first special figure reservation storage unit 151A and the second special figure reservation memory together with the random numbers MR1 to MR3 are extracted at the start winning time when the game ball that has passed (entered) through the mouth and the second start winning opening is detected. You may memorize | store as pending data in the part 151B.

  In the process of step S273, whether the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed by using the first special symbol is determined by the first special symbol display device 4A based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied, Regardless of whether the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed by using the second special symbol is determined by the second special symbol display device 4B based on the establishment of the second starting condition, a common random Using the numerical data indicating the common random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern updated by a counter or the like, the variation pattern can be determined as any of a plurality of types by a common processing module. Further, in the process of step S273, regardless of the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S271, a plurality of types of variation patterns are generated by a common processing module using numerical data indicating the common random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern. Either can be determined.

  After the change pattern is determined in step S273, a special figure change time which is a variable symbol display time corresponding to the change pattern determination result is set (step S274). After that, according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value, the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The setting for starting the variation of the special symbol is performed so as to start any of the above (step S275). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “1”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “2”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is performed.

  Subsequent to the process of step S275, settings for transmitting various commands for starting the special symbol change are performed (step S276). For example, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 103 sends a gaming state designation command, a first variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the notification command and the pending storage number notification command, setting data indicating a storage address (first address) in the ROM 101 of the first variation start command table prepared in advance is provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155. In the designated transmission command buffer, the data is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 103 sends a gaming state designation command, a second variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the notification command and the pending storage number notification command, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second variation start command table prepared in advance is a buffer designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. Store in the area. When such setting in step S274 is performed, every time the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 28 is executed after the variation pattern setting process is completed, the main board 11 applies to the effect control board 12. Game state designation command, first variation start command or second variation start command, variation pattern designation command, variable display result notification command, first reserved memory number notification command, second reserved memory number notification command, total reserved memory number notification command The winning determination result designation command is sequentially transmitted. The order in which these effect control commands are transmitted can be arbitrarily changed. For example, after the variable display result notification command is transmitted first, the first variation start command, the second variation start command, or the variation pattern designation command is transmitted. The game state designation command and the pending storage number notification command may be transmitted in this order. Thereafter, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation process (step S277), and then the fluctuation pattern setting process is terminated.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop process executed in step S113 of FIG. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 35, first, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a special figure fixed display flag provided in, for example, the game control flag setting unit 152 or the like is on (step S291). Here, the special figure fixed display flag is set to the on state by the process of step S295 described later in response to the fixed special symbol that is the variable display result in the special figure game being derived and displayed.

  When the special figure fixed display flag is OFF in step S291 (step S291; No), settings for deriving and displaying the fixed special symbol are performed (step S292). At this time, a setting for transmitting a decorative symbol stop command to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S293). Also, a predetermined time (for example, 1000 milliseconds) is set as the special figure confirmation display time (step S294). For example, in the process of step S294, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the special figure confirmation display time may be set in the game control process timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153. Then, after the special figure confirmation display flag is set to the on state (step S295), the special symbol stop process is terminated. In this way, after the fixed special symbol is derived and displayed by the process of step S292, the special symbol process processing according to the occurrence of the timer interrupt is performed until the special symbol fixed display time set in step S294 elapses. Each time the stop process is executed, it is determined in step S291 that the special figure fixed display flag is on.

  If the special figure confirmation display flag is ON in step S291 (step S291; Yes), it is determined whether or not the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed (step S296). For example, in the process of step S296, the game control process timer value that is the stored value of the game control process timer in which the timer initial value is set by the process of step S294 is read, and whether or not the timer value has become “0”. Accordingly, it may be determined whether or not the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed. If the timer value is a value other than “0”, the game control process timer value is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time the game control timer interrupt process is executed based on the occurrence of the timer interrupt. That's fine. If the special figure confirmation display time has not elapsed in step S296 (step S296; No), the special symbol stop process is terminated to wait until the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed.

  When the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed in step S296 (step S296; Yes), after clearing the special figure confirmation display flag to turn it off (step S297), it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is on. Determination is made (step S298). At this time, if the big hit flag is on (step S298; Yes), a predetermined time is set as a big hit start production waiting time (step S299). In addition, a setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S300). For example, in the process of step S300, setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the hit start specifying command table prepared in advance for transmitting the hit start specifying command corresponding to the big hit type buffer value is transmitted in the transmission command buffer. What is necessary is just to store in the buffer area | region designated with the pointer.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S300, the big hit flag is cleared and turned off (step S301). In addition, a setting for ending the probability variation state and the time reduction state is performed (step S302). For example, as the processing in step S302, processing for clearing the probability variation flag and the time-short flag to turn off, processing for clearing the time-count counter for counting the remaining number of special game executed in the high base, etc. May be executed. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “4”, which is a value corresponding to the big hit release pre-processing (step S303), and then the special symbol stop process is terminated.

  When the big hit flag is off in step S298 (step S298; No), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is on (step S304). At this time, if the small hit flag is on (step S304; Yes), a predetermined time is set as a small hit start production waiting time (step S305). Subsequently, a setting for transmitting a hit start designation command corresponding to the special figure display result being “small hit” from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S306). Thereafter, the small hit flag is cleared and turned off (step S307). Also, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”, which is a value corresponding to the pre-opening process for small hits (step S308).

  If the small hit flag is OFF in step S304 (step S304; No), the special figure process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to “0” (step S309). After performing either of the processes of steps S308 and S309, it is determined whether or not the time reduction control or the high opening control in the high base is to be ended (step S310), and then the special symbol stop process is ended. . For example, in the process of step S310, when the time reduction flag is on, the time reduction count value which is the stored value of the time reduction counter is updated by subtracting 1 for example. Then, it is determined whether or not the updated short time count value matches a predetermined short time end determination value (for example, “0” or the like). At this time, if it coincides with the time reduction end determination value, the time reduction control or the high release control in the high base may be ended by clearing the time reduction flag and turning it off. On the other hand, if it does not coincide with the time reduction end determination value, the state of the time reduction flag may be maintained and the process of step S310 may be ended. It should be noted that even when the gaming state is the probability change state, if the time reduction flag is on, it is determined whether or not the time reduction control is to be ended, and the time reduction control may be ended based on the determination result of the end. Thus, while the time-shortening control is ended, the probability variation control may be continued until the next variable display result becomes “big hit”, or until a predetermined number of special game is executed. As a result, the gaming state can be changed to the latent probability. Alternatively, for the probability change state in which the time reduction flag is on and the probability change flag is on, the time reduction control may be continuously performed until the variable display result becomes “big hit”.

  In the process of step S310, for example, numerical data indicating a random value for probability variation control termination determination is extracted from a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, and probability variation control termination determination stored in the ROM 101 or the like in advance is performed. It may be determined whether or not the probability variation control is ended by referring to the table or when the number of executions of the special figure game during the probability variation control reaches a predetermined probability variation end determination value. On the other hand, in the process of step S310, the process for ending the probability variation control may not be executed, and the probability variation control may be continued until the next variable display result becomes “big hit”. Alternatively, the process of determining whether or not to end the probability variation control based on the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the probability variation control is determined (predetermined), for example, in step S240 shown in FIG. It may be executed before.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit end process executed in step S117 of FIG. In the jackpot end process shown in FIG. 36, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit end presentation waiting time has elapsed (step S321). As an example, in the post-hit opening post-processing in step S116 shown in FIG. Set to the game control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S321, for example, the game control process timer value is updated by subtracting 1 or the like, and the updated game control process timer value matches a predetermined waiting time elapsed determination value (for example, “0” or the like). Whether or not the big hit end production waiting time has elapsed may be determined according to whether or not the game has been done. If the big hit end presentation waiting time has not elapsed in step S321 (step S321; No), the big hit end processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when the big hit end presentation waiting time has elapsed in step S321 (step S321; Yes), the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is read (step S322). , It is specified whether the big hit type is "non-probability change", "probability change", or "surprise change". At this time, it is determined whether or not the identified jackpot type is “uncertain change” (step S323).

  When it is determined in step S323 that the big hit type is “non-probable change” (step S323; Yes), a setting for starting the control for changing the gaming state to the short-time state is performed (step S324). For example, the CPU 103 sets the time reduction flag to the on state, and sets a predetermined count initial value (for example, “100”) corresponding to the upper limit value of the special figure game that can be executed in the time reduction state to the time reduction counter Set to. On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit type is “probability change” or “probability” (step S323; No), setting for starting the control for changing the gaming state to the probability change state is performed (step S325). For example, the CPU 103 sets both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag to the on state.

  It should be noted that settings may be made for controlling the probability variation state of different types depending on whether the jackpot type is determined to be “probability change” or the case where the jackpot type is determined to be “probability”. As an example, if the jackpot type is determined to be “probability change”, both the probability change flag and the time reduction flag are set to the on state, the initial value of the time reduction count value is not set, and the special figure display result is It is set so that both the probability variation control and the time reduction control are continuously performed until the “big hit” is reached. On the other hand, when the big hit type is determined to be “surprise accuracy”, both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are set to the on state, and the initial value of the time reduction count value is the same as in the case of controlling to the time reduction state. The probability variation control is continuously performed until the special figure display result becomes “big hit”, while the time reduction control is continued until the number of executions of the special figure game reaches a predetermined number (for example, “100”). You may set as follows. Alternatively, when the big hit type is determined to be “surprise accuracy”, if the predetermined short-and-short-term accuracy flag is on, the setting for starting the short-time control is performed together with the probability variation control, while the short- and middle-range accuracy flag is off. If there is, a setting for starting only the probability variation control may be performed. Here, for example, when it is determined in step S298 shown in FIG. 35 that the big hit flag is on, the big hit type is “surprise” and the short time flag is on. Corresponding to the control being performed, the on state may be set. Alternatively, for example, when the big hit type is determined to be “surprise” in step S244 shown in FIG. 33, a variable symbol such as a special symbol is displayed corresponding to the fact that the hour / hour flag is on and the hour / hour control is performed. When started, the short / medium rush accuracy flag may be set to the on state.

  After executing one of the processes in steps S324 and S325, the special figure process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to “0” (step S326), and then the jackpot end process is terminated.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S16 of FIG. 28 as normal symbol process processing. In the normal symbol process shown in FIG. 37, the CPU 103 first executes a gate passage determination process (step S130). For example, in the gate passage determination process in step S130, it is determined whether the gate switch 21 is on based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21, and if it is off, the gate passage determination process ends. On the other hand, when the gate switch 21 is on, a general-purpose reserved storage count value indicating the number of general-purpose reserved storage, which is the number of reserved data stored in the general-purpose reserved storage unit 151C, is previously set as a general-purpose reserved upper limit value. It is determined whether or not the value is a predetermined value (for example, “4”). At this time, if the usual figure holding upper limit value has been reached, the passage of the current game ball at the passing gate is invalidated and the gate passing determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if the usual figure hold upper limit value is not reached, for example, random numbers for updating the usual figure display result are selected from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 or the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154. Numerical data indicating the numerical value MR5 is extracted. The numerical data indicating the random value MR5 extracted at this time is set as reserved data at the head of the empty entry in the general-purpose reserved storage unit 151C, whereby the random value MR5 is stored. In this case, after updating so as to add 1 to the usual reserved memory number count value, the gate passage determination process is terminated.

  After executing the gate passage determination process in step S130, the CPU 103 selects one of the processes in steps S140 to S143 shown in FIG. And run.

  The normal symbol normal process in step S140 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “0”. In the normal symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol display device 20 starts the normal symbol game based on the presence / absence of reserved data stored in the general symbol hold storage unit 151C. At this time, for example, if there is pending data stored in the universal figure storage unit 151C, the universal figure display result, which is a variable display result of the normal symbol in the usual figure game, is set to “per common figure” or “normal figure” After the general map display result determination process for determining whether to “miss” is performed, the value of the general map process flag is updated to “1”.

  In the general map display result determination process, a predetermined general map display result determination table is referred to based on numerical data indicating a random value MR5 for determining the general map display result included in the reserved data read from the general map storage unit 151C. The general map display result is determined. Here, in the common map display result determination table, when the time reduction flag is on, the ratio of the decision to make the general map display result “per map” is higher than when the time reduction flag is off. In addition, the determined value is assigned to the normal map display result. As a result, the variable display result of the normal symbol in the normal game is more likely to be “per normal map” in the special game state such as in the high base where the short time control and the high opening control are performed in the probability change state and the short time state compared to the normal state. As a result, the frequency at which the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is expanded and opened is increased, and the game ball easily passes (enters) the second starting winning opening.

  In the general map display result determination process, the general map change time corresponding to the general map display result is also determined. At this time, when the time reduction flag is on, the normal time fluctuation time is set to be shorter than when the time reduction flag is off. As a result, in a special game state such as during a high base where time-shortening control or high-opening control is performed in the probability variation state or time-shortening state, the interval for deriving and displaying the normal symbol variable display result in the normal game is shortened. The interval at which the variable display result of “per standard” is derived and displayed is shortened, the frequency of the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is expanded and opened, and the game ball becomes the second starting winning opening. It becomes easy to pass (enter). Further, in the general map display result determination process, when the general map display result is “per normal map”, the tilt control time that is the time for the second start winning opening to be in the expanded open state or the number of times to be in the expanded open state A certain number of tilt control times may be set. At this time, when the time reduction flag is on, the tilt control time and the number of times of tilt control are set to be larger than when the time reduction flag is off. As a result, in a special game state such as during a high base where time-shortening control or high-opening control is performed in the probability variation state or short-time state, the time and number of times that the second start winning opening is in the open state is increased, so that the game ball It becomes easier to pass (enter) the second start winning opening. Note that the setting for setting the second start winning opening in the expanded open state may be performed in the normal symbol stop process in step S142 or the normal electric accessory actuating process in step S143.

  The normal symbol variation process in step S141 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “1”. In this normal symbol variation process, the normal symbol display 20 is set to vary the normal symbol, and the elapsed time after the normal symbol starts to be varied is measured. Further, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time thus measured has reached a predetermined normal time fluctuation time.

  The normal symbol stop process in step S142 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “2”. In this normal symbol stop process, the normal symbol display 20 stops the change of the normal symbol based on the elapse of the normal symbol change time, and the fixed normal symbol which is the variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). ) To make settings. The ordinary electric accessory actuating process of step S143 is executed when the value of the normal process flag is “3”. In this ordinary electric accessory actuating process, the movable wing piece included in the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B is vertically aligned with the fact that the variable display result (the general map display result) in the normal game is “per normal map”. The setting for changing the second start winning opening from the normal open state to the enlarged open state by moving from the position to the tilt position is performed.

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 38 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12. Performs register settings for the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S72). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S72; No), the process of step S72 is repeatedly executed and waits.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a control signal that becomes an effect control command from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. Capture. The effect control command captured at this time is stored, for example, in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194. As an example, when the production control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the production control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S72 (step S72; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S73), and command analysis processing is executed (step S74). In the command analysis process executed in step S74, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the reading is performed. Settings and control corresponding to the issued effect control command are performed.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S74, an effect control process is executed (step S75). In the effect control process in step S75, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and a decoration LED, a shutter With respect to the control contents of the rendering operation using various rendering devices such as 38H, 38L and the rendering model driving operation, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like.

  Following the effect control process in step S75, an effect random number update process is executed (step S76), and random numbers counted by the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 are used as various random values used for effect control. The numerical data shown is updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S72.

  39 to 41 are flowcharts showing an example of processing executed in step S74 of FIG. 38 as command analysis processing. In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). When read, the value of the read pointer is incremented by +2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that reading is performed every 2 bytes (1 command).

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 120 stores the variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

  If the received effect control command is a variable display result designation command (step S617), the effect control CPU 120 stores the variable display result notification command in a variable display result notification command storage area formed in the RAM ( Step S618).

  If the received effect control command is a decorative symbol stop command (step S619), the effect control CPU 120 sets a decorative symbol stop command reception flag (step S620).

  If the received effect control command is a hit start designation command (step S621), the effect control CPU 120 sets a hit start designation command reception flag corresponding to the hit type specified from the EXT data (step S622).

  If the received effect control command is the first variation start command (step S623), the first variation start command reception flag is set (step S624). If the received effect control command is the second variation start command (step S625), the second variation start command reception flag is set (step S626).

  If the received effect control command is a hit end designation command (step S627), the effect control CPU 120 sets a hit end designation command reception flag corresponding to the hit type specified from the EXT data (step S628).

  If the received effect control command is a power-on designation command (initialization designation command) (step S629), the effect control CPU 120 performs initialization after performing the shutter position initialization process (step S630) shown in FIG. Control is performed to display an initial screen indicating that the processing has been executed on the image display device 5 (step S631). The initial screen includes an initial display of predetermined production symbols.

  If the effect control command received is a power failure recovery designation command (step S632), after performing the shutter position initialization process (step S633) shown in FIG. (Screen displaying information for informing the player that the player is in the game) is controlled (step S634), and a power failure recovery flag is set (step S635).

  If the received effect control command is a gaming state designation command (step S636), a gaming state flag corresponding to the gaming state is set (step S637). Specifically, if the gaming state designation command designates the normal state, the effect control CPU 120, if set, the probability variation state flag indicating that the gaming state is the certain variation state, or the gaming state is Reset the time-short state flag indicating that the time-short state. Further, if the received gaming state designation command designates the time reduction state, the effect control CPU 120 sets only the time reduction state flag. Further, if the received game state designation command designates the probability variation state, the effect control CPU 120 sets a probability variation state flag and a short state flag. If the received game state designation command designates the latent probability changing state, the effect control CPU 120 sets only the probability changing state flag.

  If the received effect control command is the first reserved memory number designation command or the second reserved memory number designation command (step S638), the effect control CPU 120 performs the reserved memory update process shown in FIG. 43 (step 639). .

  If the received effect control command is the total reserved memory number designation command (step S640), the effect control CPU 120 uses the effect control counter based on the second byte data (EXT data) of the total reserved memory number designation command. The value of the total reserved memory number counter (total number of reserved memories) in the setting unit 193 is updated (step S641).

  If the received effect control command is a time reduction number designation command (step S642), the effect control CPU 120 in the effect control counter setting unit 193 based on the second byte data (EXT data) of the time reduction number designation command. The value of the time reduction counter (time reduction number) is updated (step S643). That is, the effect control CPU 120 stores the remaining number of times in the time-saving state indicated by the time-saving number designation command.

  If the received effect control command is a special winning opening open designation command (step S645), the effect control CPU 120 sets a special winning opening open flag (step S646).

  If the received effect control command is a designation command after opening the big prize opening (step S647), the production control CPU 120 sets a flag after opening the big prize opening (step S648).

  Next, if the received effect control command is a winning determination result designation command, the effect control CPU 120 sets a flag corresponding to the received winning determination result designation command.

  For example, if the received effect control command is a winning determination result 1 designation command (step S665), specifically, “00 (H)” is designated in the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command. In step S666, the effect control CPU 120 sets a winning determination result 1 flag indicating that it is determined that “non-reach is lost” at the time of starting winning at the first starting winning opening.

  If the received effect control command is a winning determination result 2 designation command (step S667), specifically, “01 (H)” is designated in the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command. In step S668, the effect control CPU 120 sets a winning determination result 2 flag indicating that it is determined that “super-reaching has been lost” at the time of starting winning at the first starting winning opening.

  If the received effect control command is a winning determination result 3 designation command (step S669), specifically, “02 (H)” is designated in the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command. In step S670, the effect control CPU 120 sets a winning determination result 3 flag indicating that it has been determined that a “super reach big hit” will be made when starting winning the first starting winning opening.

  If the received effect control command is a winning determination result 4 designation command (step S671), specifically, “03 (H)” is designated in the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command. In step S672, the effect control CPU 120 sets a winning determination result 4 flag indicating that it has been determined that “non-reach is lost” at the time of starting winning at the second starting winning opening.

  If the received effect control command is a winning determination result 5 designation command (step S673), specifically, “04 (H)” is designated in the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command. In step S674, the effect control CPU 120 sets a winning determination result 5 flag indicating that it is determined that the “super reach is lost” at the time of starting winning in the second starting winning opening.

  If the received effect control command is a winning determination result 6 designation command (step S675), specifically, “05 (H)” is designated in the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command. In step S676, the effect control CPU 120 sets a winning determination result 6 flag indicating that it has been determined that a “super reach big hit” will be made when the start winning is made to the second start winning opening.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets a winning determination result flag according to the received winning determination result designation command. In this embodiment, since the determination result at the time of winning is “non-reach out”, “super reach out”, “super reach jackpot”, the hold notice effect is executed. It is also possible to check whether or not only the winning determination result 1 designation command to the winning determination result 6 designation command shown in FIG.

  If the received effect control command is another command, effect control CPU 120 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S677). Then, control goes to a step S611.

  Here, in step S630 when receiving a power-on designation command transmitted from the main board 11 in response to power-on, or step S633 in receiving a power-out restoration designation command transmitted from the main board 11 in response to a power failure recovery. The shutter position initialization process performed in this manner will be described below.

  In the shutter position initialization process, the effect control CPU 120 first outputs a predetermined confirmation operation drive signal to the shutter motors 36H and 36L, thereby confirming the operation of the shutter sensors 37H and 37L. When a predetermined operation is performed, for example, an operation of returning the initial position after moving the storage position that is the initial position by a predetermined amount, and moving from the initial position, the shutters 38H and 37L by the shutter sensors 37H and 37L When 38L is not detected and the shutter is moved to the initial position (storage position), the shutter sensors 37H and 37L are improved by confirming that the shutters 38H and 38L are detected by the shutter sensors 37H and 37L. It is confirmed whether or not it is operating (step S680).

  If the shutter sensors 37H and 37L are not operating properly (No in step S681), the process proceeds to step S688, and an error code that can specify that the shutter sensors 37H and 37L are defective is displayed on the image display device. When the shutter sensors 37H and 37L are defective, the shutters 38H and 38L are not in the predetermined storage position, so that the player cannot see the hold display by the shutters 38H and 38L. In order to prevent this, the hold display prohibition flag is set so that the special hold storage number is not displayed in the first hold memory number display area 5D and the second hold memory number display area 5U. End the initialization process.

  If the shutter sensors 37H and 37L are operating satisfactorily, the process proceeds to step S682 by determining Yes in step S681, and after setting the initial value 0 to the number of retries, the shutter sensors 37H and 37L It is determined whether or not 37L has detected the shutters 38H and 38L, that is, whether or not both shutters 38H and 38L are stopped at the initial storage position (step S683).

  If the shutters 38H and 38L both stop at the initial storage position in this determination, the process proceeds to step S687, and if the hold display prohibition flag is set, the set hold display prohibition flag is set. When one of the shutters 38H and 38L is not stopped at the initial storage position, the process proceeds to step S684, and the number of retries has reached 3. Determine whether or not.

  If the number of retries has not reached 3, after adding 1 to the number of retries (step S685), the shutter motors 36H and 36L corresponding to the shutter sensors 37H and 37L that have not detected the shutters 38H and 38L. After a drive signal having a predetermined number of steps exceeding the number of steps movable in the initial position direction (storage direction) is output and operated in the initial position direction (storage direction) (step S686), the process proceeds to step S683. By returning and determining whether or not the shutters 38H and 38L are both stopped at the storage position which is the initial position, the operation toward the initial position direction (storage direction) is performed up to three times.

  If it is determined that the shutters 38H and 38L have not stopped at the initial storage position even when the number of retries reaches three, that is, if it is determined Yes in step S684, step S688 is performed. Then, an error code capable of specifying that the shutters 38H and 38L are not stored well is displayed on the image display device 5, and the shutters 38H and 38L are stored well in a predetermined storage position as an initial position. In order to prevent a situation where the player cannot see the hold display by the shutters 38H and 38L, the hold display prohibition flag is set and the first hold storage number display area 5D is set. In addition, the shutter position initialization process is performed so that the special figure reserved memory number is not displayed in the second reserved memory number display area 5U. To completion.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when the power-on designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 when the power is newly turned on, and when the power failure is restored after the occurrence of the power failure or the like. In any case when the power failure recovery designation command is transmitted from the main board 11, the shutter position initialization process is performed to determine whether or not the shutters 38H and 38L are correctly stored in the initial position, and the initial position is determined. Is not stored correctly, the hold display prohibition flag is set so that the special hold storage number is not displayed in the first hold memory number display area 5D and the second hold memory number display area 5U, It is possible to prevent misidentification or the like due to the hold storage display.

  Here, the pending storage update process executed in step S639 will be described below with reference to FIG. Since the contents of the process are the same for the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory, the contents for the second are omitted by describing them in parentheses.

  First, it is specified whether the received production control command is the first reserved memory number designation command or the second reserved memory number designation command, that is, whether the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory (step). S900).

  Then, the first (2) reserved storage number specified by the received first (2) reserved storage number designation command and the first (2) specified from the data stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 195 at that time 2) Compare with the number of reserved memories, whether or not the first (2) reserved memory number specified by the received first (2) reserved memory number designation command is larger, that is, the first number by the effective start winning 1 (2) It is determined whether or not the number of reserved storage is increased.

  When the first (second) reserved storage number is an increase (Yes in step S901), “3” as the notification target data has already been stored in the first (2) reserved storage unit of the special figure reservation storage unit 195. It is determined whether it is stored (step S904).

  If the advance notice target data “3” has already been set, that is, if the advance notice of super-reach is already implemented, the process proceeds to step S909 and the first (2) reservation storage unit is updated. After storing the winning data “1” indicating the winning (as the highest ranking among the rankings where “0” indicating no winning is stored), the process proceeds to step S910.

  On the other hand, when the notice target data “3” is not set, the winning determination result 2 indicating the loss of super reach 2 (5) the winning determination result 2 (5) flag by receiving the designated command or the super reach per flag Whether or not the winning determination result 3 (6) flag is set by reception of the designated command is indicated, that is, the newly added number of reserved memory corresponds to the corresponding reserved memory. It is determined whether or not super reach occurs in variable display of symbols (step S905).

  If the winning determination result 2, 3 (5, 6) flag is not set (No in step S905), the process proceeds to step S911, where the random number SR5 for determining the holding notice is extracted, and the extracted SR5 It is determined whether the value of “1” is “1”.

  If the value of SR5 is not “1”, the process proceeds to step S909, and the lowest position of the first (2) reserved storage unit (the highest rank among the ranks storing “0” indicating no winning) is stored. After the winning data “1” indicating that winning is stored as the (ranking) data, the process proceeds to step S910. On the other hand, if the value of SR5 is “1”, the process proceeds to step S908, where the lowest position of the first (2) reserved storage unit (the highest rank among the ranks storing “0” indicating no winning) is stored. (2), which is a target of notice and indicates a loss.

  In other words, even when the winning determination result 2, 3 (5, 6) flag is not set, that is, even when the super reach does not occur, “2” as a subject of advance notice is stored, which will be described later. Thus, the same hold notice display as that for super reach is displayed (so-called ignorance).

  When the winning determination result 2, 3 (5, 6) flag is set (Yes in step S905), the winning determination result 3 (6) indicating winning per super reach is determined. Result 3 (6) It is determined whether or not the flag is set, that is, whether or not the winning is achieved by the super reach (step S906). If the winning determination result 3 (6) flag is set, the process proceeds to step S907, and the lowest order ("0" indicating no winning is stored in the first (2) reserved storage unit). In addition to storing data “3” indicating that the data is the target of the advance notice as the data of the highest rank of the target and being hit by the super-reach of the target, the process proceeds to step S910. On the other hand, if the winning determination result 3 (6) flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S908, where the lowest order ("0" indicating no winning is stored) of the first (2) holding storage unit. In addition to storing the notice target deviation data “2” indicating that the data is the object of the notice as the data of the highest rank in the list and that the object is super-reach, the process proceeds to step S910. In step S910, the winning determination result flag that has been set is cleared.

  If the first (second) reserved memory number is not increased (No in step S901), that is, if the first (second) reserved memory number decreases, the process proceeds to step S912, and the first (2) reserved memory number is stored. The data in the uppermost (first) storage area in the storage unit is cleared, and the contents of each storage area are shifted to the next higher rank and updated. That is, in the first (2) hold storage unit, the data in the order 1 is deleted, and the data stored in the storage areas corresponding to the orders 2, 3, and 4 are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the orders 1, 2, and 3. In order 4, “0” indicating no winning is stored.

  In this manner, when the first reserved memory number designation command or the second reserved memory number designation command is received, the data in the first (2) reserved memory unit is updated, whereby the reserved memory display shown in FIG. When the control process is performed in step S169 in the effect control process shown in FIG. 44, the updated first (2) is displayed in the first reserved memory number display area 5D and the second reserved memory number display area 5U. A hold storage display based on the data in the hold storage unit is performed.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S75 of FIG. 38 as the effect control process. In this effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 executes the hold storage display control process of step S169 shown in FIG. 45A every time and sets the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191. In response, one of the following processes in steps S170 to S177 is selected and executed.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. This variable display start waiting process determines whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5 based on whether or not the first variation start command or the second variation start command is received from the main board 11. The process etc. which determine are included.

  The variable display effect setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. This variable display effect setting processing corresponds to the decoration on the image display device 5 in response to the start of variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. In order to perform variable display of symbols and other various effects, it includes a process of determining a fixed decorative symbol and various effect control patterns according to the variation pattern of special symbols and the type of display result.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 reads various control data from the effect control pattern corresponding to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192, and displays the decorative pattern. Processing for performing various effects control during variable display is included. After performing such effect control, for example, when an end code indicating the end of variable display of decorative symbols is read from the symbol variation control pattern, or when a decorative symbol stop command transmitted from the main board 11 is received. Correspondingly, the finalized decorative symbol as the final stop symbol that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is displayed in a completely stopped manner. When the final decorative design is displayed in response to the end code being read from the design variation control pattern, the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command has elapsed. In addition, even if the production control command from the main board 11 is not used, it is possible to determine and display the variable display result by autonomously deriving and displaying the determined decorative pattern on the production control board 12 side. When the finalized decorative symbol is displayed as a complete stop, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special figure waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. When the hit start designation command is received and the hit start designation command designates the start of the big hit gaming state, the value of the production process flag is “6” corresponding to the big hit middle production process. Update to On the other hand, when the hit start designation command is received and the hit start designation command designates the start of the small hit gaming state, the value of the production process flag is a value corresponding to the small hit medium production process. To “4”. When the production control process timer times out without receiving a hit start designation command, it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is “lost”, and the value of the production process flag is the initial value. Update to “0”.

  The small hitting effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In the small hit effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the small hit gaming state, and displays an effect image based on the set content in the display area of the image display device 5. The sound and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and the game effect lamp 9 is output by outputting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect control in the small hit gaming state such as lighting / extinguishing / flashing the decoration LED is executed. In the small hit effect processing, for example, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”, which is a value corresponding to the small hit end effect, in response to receiving a hit end designation command from the main board 11, for example. .

  The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit gaming state, etc., and displays an effect image based on the set contents in the display area of the image display device 5. The sound and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and the game effect lamp 9 is output by outputting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14. And various effect controls at the end of the small hit gaming state, such as turning on / off / flashing the decorative LED. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value.

  The big hit effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this jackpot effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the jackpot gaming state, and displays an effect image based on the set content in the display area of the image display device 5. In addition, a sound or sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and a game effect lamp 9 or a decoration is output by outputting a command (electric signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect control is executed in the big hit gaming state such as turning on / off / flashing the LEDs for use. In the big hit effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a hit end designation command from the main board 11, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to “7” which is a value corresponding to the ending effect processing.

  The ending effect process in step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state, for example, and displays an effect image based on the set content in the display area of the image display device 5. The sound and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and the game effect lamp 9 and decoration are output by outputting the command (electric signal) to the lamp control board 14 Various effect controls such as turning on / off / flashing the LED are executed at the end of the big hit gaming state. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value.

  Here, the hold storage display control process performed in step S169 will be described with reference to FIG. 45. In the hold storage display control process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the hold display position change flag is set. (Step S920).

  When the hold display position change flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a hold display position change instruction to the display control unit 123, thereby displaying the first hold memory number display area 5D and the second hold memory number display. The position of area 5U is changed (step S921). Then, the production control CPU 120 outputs a hold display instruction including the data of each hold number read from the first hold storage unit and the second hold storage unit to the display control unit 123, so that the display position is changed. In the first reserved memory number display area 5D and the second reserved memory number display area 5U, the reserved memory display corresponding to the data in the first reserved memory unit and the second reserved memory unit is performed (step S924).

  If the hold display position change flag is not set, it is determined whether the hold display prohibition flag is set (step S922). When the hold display prohibition flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a hold non-display instruction to the display control unit 123, whereby the first hold memory number display area 5D and the second hold memory number display area 5U. On the other hand, the display of the stored memory number is not displayed, and the process is terminated (step S923). On the other hand, when neither the held display prohibition flag nor the held display position change flag is set, the presentation control CPU 120 displays the first held storage unit. In addition, by outputting a hold display instruction including data of each hold number read from the second hold storage unit to the display control unit 123, the first hold storage number display area 5D and the second hold storage number display area 5U (note that The display position is not changed.) In addition, the display of the hold storage corresponding to the data of the first hold storage unit and the second hold storage unit is performed. To applied (step S924).

  That is, as will be described later, the hold display position change flag is set when an opening / closing effect of the shutters 38H and 38L is performed, or when an instruction operation for the trigger button 31A or an instruction operation for the push button 31B is validated. Thus, the positions of the first reserved memory number display area 5D and the second reserved memory number display area 5U are changed.

  The display mode of the hold display in the first hold memory number display area 5D and the second hold memory number display area 5U is shown in FIG. As for the hold display corresponding to the order in which “1” indicating that there is a prize is stored in the first hold storage unit or the second hold storage unit, “●” indicating that there is a hold is displayed, and the notice target deviation data With respect to the hold display corresponding to the order in which “2” or the per-notice target data “3” is stored, a star (first hold storage unit) that notifies that there is a possibility of becoming a super reach or a big hit. ) And rhombus (second reserved storage unit), while “0” indicating no winning is not displayed for the order in which “0” indicating no winning is stored.

  In this embodiment, the display for notifying that there is a possibility of becoming super reach or a big hit may be different between the first reserved memory number display area 5D and the second reserved memory number display area 5U. By doing so, it is easy for the player to determine which is the hold notice of the first special figure and which is the hold notice of the second special figure. The same area 5D and the second reserved storage number display area 5U may be used.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the possibility of becoming a super reach or a big hit is displayed with stars and rhombuses that are different from other held indications that do not become super reach, The symbol to be displayed may be the same as other reserved display that does not become super reach, and the color may be changed.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display effect setting process executed in step S171 of FIG. In the variable display effect setting process shown in FIG. 46, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and the special figure display result is “lost”. It is determined whether or not (step S501). At this time, if it is determined that the special figure display result is “lost” (step S501; Yes), it is designated by reading the EXT data in the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11, for example. It is determined whether or not the variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach” (step S502).

  If it is determined in step S502 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S502; Yes), a combination of fixed decorative symbols that is the final stop symbol constituting the non-reach combination is determined (step S503). As an example, in the process of step S503, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the left determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to a predetermined left determined symbol determination table, the left determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined among the determined decorative symbols. Next, a predetermined right determined symbol determination table preliminarily stored in the ROM 121 or the like is extracted by extracting numerical data indicating random values for determining the right determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. , Etc., the right determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. At this time, the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol may be determined so as to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined symbol determining table or the like. Subsequently, numerical data indicating a random number for determining a medium fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. , Etc., the middle fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined among the fixed decorative symbols.

  If it is determined in step S502 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S502; No), a combination of confirmed decorative symbols that is a final stop symbol constituting the reach combination is determined (step S504). As an example, in the process of step S504, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the left and right determined symbols updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. In addition, by referring to a predetermined left / right determined symbol determination table or the like, the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 among the determined decorative symbols are stopped and displayed together. The decorative symbol with the same symbol number is determined. Further, numerical data indicating a random number for determining a medium fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is extracted. By referring to this, among the determined decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. Here, for example, when the confirmed decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, such as when the symbol number of the middle confirmed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol, an arbitrary value (For example, “1”) may be added to or subtracted from the symbol number of the medium-decorated decorative symbol so that the finalized decorative symbol is not the jackpot combination but the reach combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium-decorated decorative symbol, the difference (design difference) between the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium-decorated decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. .

  When it is determined in step S501 that the special figure display result is not “lost” (step S501; No), the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, or the special figure display It is determined whether the result is “small hit” or other cases (step S505). At this time, if it is determined that the big hit type is “surprise” or the special figure display result is “small hit” (step S505; Yes), the big hit type such as one of the second opening chances TC1 to TC4 is “ The combination of the finalized decorative symbol that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the case of “accuracy” or the special symbol display result of “small hit” is determined (step S506). As an example, corresponding to the case where any one of the variation patterns PC1-1 to PC1-3 is designated by the variation pattern designation command, the final stop symbols constituting any of the second opening chances TC1 to TC4 and The combination of the determined decorative design is determined. In this case, a predetermined chance index determination table preliminarily stored in the ROM 121 or the like is extracted by extracting numerical data indicating random numbers for chance index determination updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. It is sufficient to determine a combination of definite decorative symbols constituting any one of the second opening chances TC1 to TC4 by referring to the above. Further, when either the variation pattern PC1-4 or the variation pattern PC1-5 is designated by the variation pattern designation command, for example, by executing the same process as in step S504, the final stop symbols constituting the reach combination are performed. What is necessary is just to determine the combination of the definite design which becomes.

  When it is determined in step S505 that the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “non-probability change” or “probability change” other than “probability” (step S505; No), the final stop constituting the big hit combination A combination of the confirmed decorative symbols to be symbols is determined (step S507). As an example, in the process of step S507, first, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a jackpot fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and subsequently stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. Stop by aligning with the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 by referring to the stored predetermined jackpot determined symbol determination table. A decorative symbol having the same symbol number is determined. For example, when the jackpot type is “non-probable variation”, one of the non-probability variation symbols (for example, decorative symbols indicating the numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, “8”) is selected and non-probable It becomes the final stop symbol that constitutes the probability variation big hit combination. When the jackpot type is “probability change”, for example, the numbers of non-probability change symbols and probability change symbols (for example, “1”, “3”, “5”, “7”) are shown depending on the presence / absence of the probability change promotion effect. Any one of the decorative patterns) may be selected. More specifically, when a probabilistic promotion effect such as a fluctuating promotion effect or a jackpot promotion effect is executed, one of the non-probable symbols is selected in the same way as when the jackpot type is “non-probable change”. This is the final stop symbol constituting the non-probable variation big hit combination. On the other hand, when the probability variation promotion effect is not executed, one is selected from the probability variation symbols and becomes the final stop symbol constituting the probability variation jackpot combination. Alternatively, when the jackpot type is “probability variation”, either the non-probability variation symbol or the probability variation symbol is selected at a predetermined ratio, and it is determined whether or not to execute the probability variation promotion effect corresponding to the selection result. May be. In this case, when the non-probable variation symbol is selected, it is determined to execute the probability variation promotion effect, while when the probability variation symbol is selected, it may be determined not to execute the probability variation promotion effect.

  After executing any of the processes of steps S503, S504, S506, and S507, settings for executing a variable display effect such as “pseudo-continuous” and “slip” are performed (step S508). For example, in the process of step S508, variable display effects such as “pseudo-continuous” and “slip” are executed according to the variation pattern specified by reading the EXT data in the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not. At this time, if it is determined that the variable display effect of “pseudo train” or “slip” is executed, the pseudo display is temporarily stopped in the variable display effect of “pseudo train” and any one of the pseudo-continuous chance items GC1 to GC8 is displayed. And the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the variable display effect of “slip” are determined.

  After executing the process of step S508, a notice effect setting process is executed (step S510). FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of the notice effect setting process executed in step S510. In the notice effect setting process shown in FIG. 47, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the notice effect by displaying the effect image, and as a use table for determining the display system notice type when it is executed. The display system notice type determination table 140A is selected and set (step S701). Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating a random number SR1-1 for display type notice type determination updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted (step S702). Then, by referring to the display system notice type determination table 140A based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR1-1 extracted in step S702, there is no display system notice at a different rate according to the variation pattern, or the character One of the display system notice types of display CAY1 and step-up display CAY2 is determined (step S703). At this time, it is determined whether or not it has been determined in step S703 without a display system notice (step S704).

  When one of the display system notice types of the character display CAY1 and the step-up display CAY2 is determined (step S704; No), the display system notice pattern determination table 141A is associated with the determined display system notice type. Then, any one of the display system notice pattern determination table 141B is selected and set as a use table (step S705). That is, if the display type notice pattern determination table 141A of the character display CAY1 is determined in step S703, the display type notice pattern determination table 141A is set. A system notice pattern determination table 141B is set. After that, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR2-1 for determining the display system notice pattern updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted (step S706). Subsequently, by referring to the display system notice pattern determination table set in step S705 based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR2-1 extracted in step S706, the display system is displayed at a different rate according to the variation pattern. A notice pattern is determined (step S707).

  When it is determined in step S704 that there is no display system notice (step S704; Yes), after executing the process of step S707, whether or not to execute a notice effect classified into the operation type notice type is executed. The process for determining the operation type advance notice type and the operation type advance notice pattern is executed. In the case of executing a notice effect classified into the display-type notice type, the notice effect classified into the operation-type notice type may be restricted so as not to be executed. In this case, after performing the process of step S707, the notice effect setting process may be terminated. In this way, only one of the notice effects produced by the display-type notice type and the notice effect classified as the operation-type notice type is executed, and the notice classified as the other notice type. By restricting the performance so as not to be executed, it is possible to prevent the contention of the notice effect, enhance the effect of the notice effect, and improve the game entertainment.

  In the process of determining the notice effect that is classified into the operation type notice type, first, the operation type notice type is used as a use table for determining whether or not the notice effect is to be executed and the operation type notice type when it is executed. The decision table 140B is selected and set (step S708). Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating a random number SR1-2 for determining an operation type notice type updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted (step S709). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR1-2 extracted in step S709, the operation system is referenced at a different rate according to the variation pattern by referring to the operation system notice type determination table 140B set in step S708. There is no prior notice, or one of the operation system notice types of push button single-shot CBY1, push-button continuous hit CBY2, trigger button single-shot CBY3, and trigger button continuous hit CBY4 is determined (step S710).

  In the process of step S710, the number of the first special figure holding memory or the second special figure is used in accordance with whether the special symbol variably displayed for use in the special figure game is the first special figure or the second special figure. The number of special figure hold memory is specified. That is, based on the reception of the first variation start command transmitted from the main board 11, the first special figure holding memory number is specified corresponding to the case where the special figure game using the first special figure is executed. To do. On the other hand, in response to the case where the special figure game using the second special figure is executed based on the reception of the second variation start command transmitted from the main board 11, the second special figure holding memory is stored. Identify the number. Then, depending on whether the specified first special figure reserved memory number or second special figure reserved memory number is “0” to “3” or “4”, it is referred to in the operation type notice type determination table 140B. Different table data may be used. As a result, the operation system advance notice is made at a different rate depending on whether or not the number of the special figure hold memory as the first special figure hold memory number or the second special figure hold memory number has reached a predetermined number (for example, “4”). None or can be determined for each operation type notice type.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not it has been determined in step S710 without operating system advance notice (step S711). And when it determines with there being no operation type | system | group notice (step S711; Yes), a notice effect setting process is complete | finished. On the other hand, when it is determined as one of the operation type advance notice types (step S711; No), the operation type advance notice pattern determination table 142A and the operation type advance notice pattern are determined corresponding to the determined operation type advance notice type. Any one of the table 142B, the operation system notice pattern determination table 142C, and the operation system notice pattern determination table 142D is selected and set as a use table (step S712). That is, if the operation type notice type determination table 142A of the push button single-shot CBY1 is determined in step S710, the operation type notice pattern determination table 142A is set, and if it is determined as the operation type notice type of the push button continuous hit CBY2, the operation is performed. When the system notice pattern determination table 142B is set and the operation type advance notice type of the trigger button single-shot CBY3 is determined, the operation system notice pattern determination table 142C is set, and the operation type notice type of the trigger button repeated CBY4 is determined. In this case, the operation system notice pattern determination table 142D is set.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S712, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR2-2 for determining the operation system notice pattern updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted (step S713). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR2-2 extracted in step S713, the operation system advance notice is determined at a different rate according to the variation pattern by referring to the operation system advance pattern determination table set in step S712. After determining the pattern (step S714), the notice effect setting process is terminated.

  In the notice effect setting processing shown in FIG. 47, the notice effect classified into the display-type notice type is first determined by the processes in steps S701 to S707, and then classified into the operation-type notice type by the processes in steps S708 to S714. The notice effect will be decided later. On the other hand, the notice effect that is classified into the operation-type notice type may be determined first, and then the notice effect that is classified into the display-type notice type may be decided later. In this case, when an operation system notice pattern for executing a notice effect classified into the operation system notice type is determined, the notice effect setting process is terminated and the notice effect classified into the display system notice type is not executed. You may do it. That is, the notice effect that is classified into the operation type notice type may be executed with priority over the notice effect that is classified into the display type notice type. Alternatively, when the notice effect setting process is started, first, the notice effect classified into either the notice effect classified as the display-type notice type or the notice effect classified as the operation-type notice type is executed. It may be determined whether to do. And the process which determines the notification pattern etc. for performing the notification effect classified into the determined notification classification should just be performed.

  After executing the notice effect setting process as described above in step S510 shown in FIG. 46, the effect control pattern is determined as one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step S511). At this time, the production control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared symbol variation control patterns corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, for example, and sets it as a usage pattern. Further, for example, one of a plurality of prepared notice effect control patterns corresponding to the display system notice pattern determined in step S707 shown in FIG. 47 and the operation system notice pattern determined in step S714 is selected. Set as usage pattern.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S511, for example, an initial value of an effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 is set corresponding to the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command (step S512). And the setting for starting the fluctuation | variation of the decoration design etc. in the image display apparatus 5 is performed (step S513). At this time, for example, the display control command designated by the display control data included in the symbol variation control pattern determined as the use pattern in step S511 is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. The variation of the decorative symbols may be started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the five display areas. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S514), and the effect setting processing during variable display ends.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display effect processing executed in step S172 of FIG. In the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 48, the effect control CPU 120 updates (for example, subtracts 1) the effect control process timer value (step S531), and uses the updated effect control process timer value as the effect control pattern. Is compared with the production control process timer determination value shown in FIG. 6 to determine whether or not any of the timer determination values is met (step S532).

  If the timer determination value matches with the timer determination value in step S532 (step S532; Yes), the effect control execution data (for example, display control data, voice control data, and the like) stored in the effect control pattern in association with the timer determination value. Lamp control data, operation detection control data, shutter control data, part of or all of the hold display position change flag control data) or an end code is read (step S533). Here, when the plurality of timer determination values indicated by the effect control pattern match the effect control process timer value in step S532, the plurality of effect controls stored in association with the matched timer determination values. The execution data may be read in step S533. Then, it is determined whether or not the end code has been read in step S533 (step S534). At this time, when it is determined that it is not the end code (step S534; No), an effect control command process for performing an instruction or setting according to the effect control execution data read in step S533 is executed. (Step S538), the variable display effect process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S534 that it is an end code (step S534; Yes), if it is set, the hold display position change flag is reset (step S535), and for example, a predetermined timer initial value is produced. A hit waiting designation command reception waiting time is set by setting it in the control process timer (step S536). Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3” which is a value corresponding to the waiting process per special figure (step S537), and the effect process during variable display is ended. As a result, when the next timer interrupt occurs, the waiting process per special figure is executed. The value is initialized to “0”. On the other hand, if a hit start designation command is received before the hit start designation command reception waiting time elapses, effect control is performed depending on whether the special figure display result is “small hit” or “big hit”. By updating the value of the process flag to “4” or “6”, it is only necessary to control the rendering operation at the time of a small hit or a big hit.

  Note that the non-overlapping position of the hold storage display in the present invention does not indicate only the initial position where the shutters 38H and 38L are completely stored, but the shutters 38H and 38L are completely stored. However, the shutters 38H and 38L may be positions where the reserved storage display is not hidden, and after the position of the display area of the reserved storage display is changed by setting the hold display position change flag, When the non-overlapping position is reached, the hold display position change flag may be reset to return the display area of the hold storage display whose position has been changed to the original position.

  Moreover, also when it does not correspond with any of the timer determination values in step S532 (step S532; No), the variable display effect processing is ended. However, if it is determined that the decorative symbol stop command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received after executing the process of step S532 or before executing the process of step S532, the process of step S536 is performed. In advance, the waiting process per special figure may be executed when the next timer interrupt occurs.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control command process executed in step S535 of FIG. In this effect control command process, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the type of effect control execution data read in the process of step S533 shown in FIG. 48 (step S721). At this time, it is specified which of the display control data, the sound control data, the lamp control data, the operation detection control data, the shutter control data, and the hold display position change flag control data included in the effect control execution data. It only has to be done.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the specified effect control execution data is display control data (step S722). At this time, when it is determined that the data is display control data (step S722; Yes), a setting for sending a display control command designated by the display control data to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123 is performed. (Step S723).

  When it is determined in step S722 that the display control data is not (step S722; No), after executing the process of step S723, it is determined whether or not the specified effect control execution data is audio control data. (Step S724). At this time, when it is determined that it is voice control data (step S724; Yes), a sound effect signal corresponding to the sound number data designated by the voice control data is sent to the voice control board 13. Setting is performed (step S725).

  When it is determined in step S724 that the data is not voice control data (step S724; No), after executing the process of step S725, it is determined whether or not the specified effect control execution data is lamp control data. (Step S726). At this time, if it is determined that the data is lamp control data (step S726; Yes), a setting is made to send an illumination signal designated by the lamp control data to the lamp control board 14 (step S727). ).

  When it is determined in step S726 that the data is not lamp control data (step S726; No), after executing the process of step S727, it is determined whether or not the specified effect control execution data is operation detection control data. Determination is made (step S728).

  At this time, when it is determined that it is not operation detection control data (step S728; No), or after the processing of step S735 is executed, it is determined whether or not the specified effect control execution data is shutter control data. Determination is made (step S736). At this time, if it is determined that the shutter control data is determined (step S736; Yes), the drive specified by the shutter control data for the shutter motor 36H and / or the shutter motor 36L specified by the shutter control data. A setting for outputting a signal is made (step S737).

  If it is determined in step S736 that it is not shutter control data (step S736; No), or after the process of step S737 is executed, the specified effect control execution data is the hold display position change flag control data. It is determined whether or not (step S738). At this time, if it is determined that it is the hold display position change flag control data (step S738; Yes), the hold display position change flag is set or reset by the hold display position change flag control data (step S739). ), The effect control command process is terminated.

  If it is determined that the operation detection control data is determined in step S728 (step S728; Yes), based on the operation detection control data, a predetermined instruction operation (for example, pressing down) on the push button 31B by the player is performed. (Operation etc.) is detected effectively, and it is determined whether or not it is a push button effective detection period which is a period in which the effect operation can be switched according to the detection result (step S729). For example, in the notice effect that is classified as single push button CBY1 or push button repeated hit CBY2, push until a predetermined time elapses after the effect image prompting the operation of the push button 31B is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. What is necessary is just to prescribe | regulate by the operation detection control data matched with the predetermined | prescribed effect control process timer determination value so that it may become a button effective detection period.

  When it is determined in step S729 that it is the push button validity detection period (step S729; Yes), the player's instruction operation for the trigger button 31A provided in the stick controller 30 is limited so as not to be detected. Detection limit setting is performed (step S730). For example, in the process of step S730, it is only necessary to limit the instruction operation to the trigger button 31A so as not to be detected by stopping the operation of the trigger sensor 35A that detects the instruction operation to the trigger button 31A. Or you may restrict | limit detection of instruction | indication operation by controlling not to check the operation detection signal transmitted from 35 A of trigger sensors. Moreover, when restrict | limiting so that instruction operation with respect to 31 A of trigger buttons may not be detected, you may restrict | limit so that tilting operation with respect to the operating rod 30A of the stick controller 30 may not be detected.

  Subsequent to the process of step S730, after performing the effect control based on the detection result of the instruction operation on the push button 31B (step S731), the effect control command process is terminated. For example, in the process of step S731, based on the operation detection signal transmitted from the push sensor 35B to the effect control board 12, it is determined whether or not a predetermined instruction operation (for example, a pressing operation) for the push button 31B has been detected. To do. And when instruction operation with respect to the push button 31B is detected, the setting for changing the production content etc. may be made according to the detection result. Even in the push button valid detection period, when the player's instruction operation on the trigger button 31A is detected, settings for changing the content of the production or the like may be performed according to the detection result. Good. In this case, when an instruction operation on the trigger button 31A is detected, the effect content may be changed in the same manner as when an instruction operation on the push button 31B is detected, or when an instruction operation on the push button 31B is detected. The contents of the presentation may be changed in a different manner.

  When it is determined in step S729 that it is not the push button effective detection period (step S729; No), based on the operation detection control data, the player tilts the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 and the trigger button 31A. A predetermined instruction operation (for example, a push-pull operation) is effectively detected, and it is determined whether or not it is a stick controller effective detection period that is a period in which the rendering operation can be switched according to the detection result (step S732). . For example, in a notice effect that is classified as single trigger button CBY3 or trigger button repeated CBY4, an effect image that prompts the user to operate the operation stick 30A of the stick controller 30 or the trigger button 31A is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. What is necessary is just to prescribe | regulate beforehand with the operation detection control data matched with the predetermined | prescribed effect control process timer determination value so that it may be set as the stick controller effective detection period until predetermined time passes.

  If it is determined in step S732 that it is the stick controller valid detection period (step S732; Yes), detection limit setting is performed to limit the player's instruction operation to the push button 31B so as not to be detected (step S732). S733). For example, in the process of step S733, it is only necessary to limit the instruction operation to the push button 31B from being detected by stopping the operation of the push sensor 35B that detects the instruction operation to the push button 31B. Or you may restrict | limit detection of instruction | indication operation by restrict | limiting not to check the operation detection signal transmitted from push sensor 35B.

  Subsequent to the process of step S733, the effect control based on the detection result of the instruction operation on the trigger button 31A is executed (step S734), and the effect control command process is terminated. For example, in the process of step S734, whether or not a predetermined instruction operation (for example, a push-pull operation) for the trigger button 31A is detected based on an operation detection signal transmitted from the trigger sensor 35A to the effect control board 12 is determined. judge. Further, based on the operation detection signal transmitted from the tilt direction sensor unit 32 to the effect control board 12, it is determined whether or not the tilt operation of the stick controller 30 with respect to the operation rod 30A is detected. Then, when a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod 30A or an instruction operation with respect to the trigger button 31A is detected, a setting for changing the contents of the production may be performed according to the detection result. Even in the trigger button valid detection period, when a player's instruction operation on the push button 31B is detected, a setting for changing the content of the effect or the like may be performed according to the detection result. Good. In this case, when an instruction operation on the push button 31B is detected, the effect content may be changed in the same manner as when an instruction operation on the trigger button 31A is detected, or when an instruction operation on the trigger button 31A is detected. The contents of the presentation may be changed in a different manner.

  When it is determined in step S732 that it is not the stick controller effective detection period (step S732; No), other operation detection control based on the operation detection control data is performed (step S735), and the effect control command processing is performed. finish. For example, in the process of step S735, based on the operation detection control data, the push button effective detection period and the stick controller effective detection period are ended, and settings for limiting the instruction operation and the like by the player from being detected thereafter are set. Can be done.

  As an example of the process executed in step S731 of such an effect control command process, when a “push button repeated hit” notice effect classified as an operation type notice type of push button repeated hit CBY2 is executed, FIG. It suffices if the push button continuous hitting process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. In the push button continuous hitting process shown in FIG. 50, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not it is a predetermined effect start time based on operation detection control data and the like (step S801). For example, in the process of step S801, when a push button validity detection period for effectively detecting an instruction operation to the push button 31B is started by a notice effect by an operation type notice pattern classified as an operation notice type of the push button continuous hit CBY2. In addition, it may be determined that it is time to start production.

  If it is determined in step S801 that the production is to start (step S801; Yes), for example, an operation detection counter initial value (by clearing an operation detection counter provided in the production control counter setting unit 193). For example, “0” or the like is set (step S802). Subsequently, an effect change determination value corresponding to the operation system notice pattern or the like is set (step S803). The effect change determination value set in step S803 indicates the number of detections of the instruction operation for the push button 31B required from the start of the predetermined effect until the first change of the effect content, and is set as a usage pattern, for example. Any numerical value may be used depending on the operation system notice pattern or the like. For example, in the case of an operation system warning pattern that has a high possibility that the variable display result will be “big hit” (hit reliability), compared to the operation system warning pattern that has a low jackpot reliability (eg, “10”). By setting a small numerical value (for example, “5”) as the effect change determination value, it is only necessary that the effect content is easily changed according to the continuous hitting operation on the push button 31B.

  When it is determined in step S801 that it is not at the start of the production (step S801; No), after executing the process of step S803, it is determined whether or not there has been a button-on detection by an instruction operation on the push button 31B ( Step S804). At this time, if it is determined that no button-on is detected (step S804; No), it is only necessary to limit the content of the production so as not to be changed by ending the push button continuous hitting process. On the other hand, when it is determined that button-on is detected (step S804; Yes), the operation detection count value is updated by, for example, adding 1 (step S805). Then, it is determined whether or not the updated operation detection count value has reached the effect change determination value (step S806).

  If the operation detection count value does not reach the effect change determination value in step S806 (step S806; No), the push button continuous hitting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the operation detection count value reaches the effect change determination value (step S806; Yes), the setting for changing the effect content is performed (step S807). For example, in the process of step S807, the content of the effect is changed according to the repeated operation on the push button 31B by switching the process data included in the effect control pattern based on the operation detection control data. That's fine. Here, the type of process data after switching, the decision ratio of switching to a plurality of types of process data, and the like, the operating system advance notice pattern set as the use pattern, the progress of the effect contents in the notice effect, step S806 The operation detection count value may be varied depending on part or all of the timing at which it is determined that the operation change count value has reached the effect change determination value.

  Subsequent to the process of step S807, a new effect change determination value is set according to the changed contents of the effect or the like (step S808), and then the process at the time of repeated push button is ended. In the process of step S808, a different numerical value may be set as the effect change determination value according to the progress of the effect operation (the degree to which the effect content has changed). For example, when the directing operation has progressed to the vicinity of the final stage of the predetermined effect content because the instruction operation for the push button 31B has been detected many times within a short time after the predetermined effect starts. By setting a larger value (for example, “20”) than the normal case (for example, “10”) as the effect change determination value, the content of the effect may be made difficult to change. Also in the process of step S808, similar to the process of step S803, the setting of the effect change determination value may be made different according to the operation system notice pattern set as the usage pattern. For example, in the case of an operation-type notice pattern informing that the degree of reliability is high, an effect change determination value so that a final achievement effect in the notice effect (for example, a scene where the opponent is pulled down by a tug of war) can be executed. Is set to a numerical value (for example, “10”, etc.) that can be actually generated. On the other hand, in the case of the operation system notice pattern informing that the reliability is low, when the notice effect has progressed to a predetermined stage, the effect change determination value is set so that the final achievement effect is not executed. It may be set to a numerical value that cannot actually be generated (for example, “9999”). Alternatively, in the case of an operation-type notice pattern that informs that the reliability is low, when the notice effect has progressed to a predetermined stage, all button-on detections by the process of step S804 are invalidated (step S804; No). After that, the content of the production may not be changed. In the process of step S808, the setting of the effect change determination value may be made different depending on whether the variable display result is “lost” or “big hit” instead of the operation system notice pattern. For example, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the effect change determination value at which the final achievement effect can be executed is the same as in the case of the operation system notice pattern informing that the reliability is high as described above. Is set. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “lost”, as in the case of the operation-related notice pattern informing that the reliability is low as described above, the final achievement effect is not executed. It is only necessary to set a change determination value.

  50, when the operation detection count value reaches the effect change determination value, the setting for changing the effect content is always performed. On the other hand, the determination as to whether or not to change the effect content may be made at a different rate depending on the operation detection count value. For example, depending on the operation detection count value, an effect content change determination table is prepared in which assignment of the determined value to the determination result of whether to change the effect content is different. Then, after updating the operation detection count value in step S805 shown in FIG. 50, for example, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the effect content change updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 To extract. Subsequently, based on the extracted random number value for determining the content of the effect, by referring to the effect content change determination table, it is determined whether to change the content of the effect at a different rate depending on the operation detection count value. What should I do?

  In addition, by referring to the production content change determination table in which the determination value assignment to the determination result of whether or not to change the production content depends on the progress status of the production content, the operation detection count value and the progress status of the production content are referred to. Whether or not to change the effect content may be determined at a different rate according to the above. Instead of deciding whether or not to change the content of the production, or together with deciding whether or not to change the content of the production, the production after the change at a different rate depending on the progress of the production content and the operation detection count value The content may be determined. Alternatively, in the push button continuous hitting process, each time an instruction operation on the push button 31B is detected, whether or not the content of the effect is changed at a different rate depending on the progress of the effect content at the current time, and the effect after the change The content may be determined.

  Another example of the process executed in step S731 of the effect control command process shown in FIG. 49 is when the “push button single shot” notice effect classified as the operation type notice type of the push button single shot CBY1 is executed. In addition, the push button single shot processing different from the push button continuous hit processing may be executed. In the push button single-shot process, the effect control CPU 120 measures, for example, the elapsed time from the start of the push button validity detection period, and based on the elapsed time when the instruction operation to the push button 31B is detected, etc. It is only necessary to determine whether or not to change the content of the effect in the notice effect, and the content of the effect after the change. Also, whether or not to change the content of the announcement when the instruction operation to the push button 31B is detected at a different rate depending on the operation system announcement pattern set as the usage pattern, the content of the effect after the change, etc. May be determined. Alternatively, depending on whether the variable display result is “losing” or “big hit”, whether or not the contents of the effect in the notice effect are changed when an instruction operation on the push button 31B is detected, The contents of the performance may be determined.

  In this way, the “push button single shot” notice effect that is classified into the push system single operation type of the push button CBY1 is executed, or “push button continuous hit” that is classified into the operation type notice type of the push button continuous hit CBY2. Depending on whether the notice effect is executed, different processing is executed in step S731. As a result, even when one instruction operation on the push button 31B is detected during the execution of the notice effect, the process for changing the effect contents in the notice effect of “single push button” and the “push button repeated hit” There is no confusion between the notice effect and the process for changing the contents of the effect.

  As an example of the process executed in step S734 of the effect control command process, when the trigger effect “single trigger button” classified as the operation type notification type of the trigger button single CBY3 is executed, etc. Time processing may be executed. In the trigger button single-shot process, the effect control CPU 120 performs display switching of effect images according to the tilting operation of the stick controller 30 with respect to the operating rod 30A based on, for example, an operation detection signal transmitted from the tilting direction sensor unit 32. It is only necessary to determine whether or not and the effect image to be displayed after switching. Then, based on the display content of the effect image at the timing when the instruction operation on the trigger button 31A is detected, it is only necessary to determine whether the effect content in the notice effect is to be changed, the effect content after the change, or the like. In addition, when the tilting operation with respect to the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 or the instruction operation with respect to the trigger button 31A is detected at a different rate according to the operation system notification pattern set as the usage pattern, the content of the effect in the notification effect is changed. Whether or not to perform, and the contents of the effect after the change may be determined.

  As another example of the process executed in step S734 of the effect control command process, the trigger button is executed when the “trigger button repeated hit” notice effect classified as the operation type notice type of the trigger button repeated hit CBY4 is executed. A process at the time of repeated trigger button different from the process at the time of single shot may be executed. In the trigger button repeated hitting process, for example, the push button repeated hitting process shown in FIG. 50 is adapted to the trigger button 31A, and the effect image is switched and displayed in accordance with the tilting operation of the stick controller 30 with respect to the operating rod 30A. It suffices if processing is executed. That is, in the trigger button continuous hitting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to switch the effect image according to the tilting operation of the stick controller 30 with respect to the operating rod 30A, as in the case of the trigger button single shot process. It is only necessary to be able to determine the effect image to be displayed after switching. Then, based on the display content of the effect image at the timing when the number of indication operations detected with respect to the trigger button 31A reaches the predetermined number, it is determined whether or not to change the effect content in the notice effect, and the effect content after the change. I can do it. In addition, when the tilting operation of the stick controller 30 with respect to the operating rod 30A is detected or the number of detections of the pointing operation with respect to the trigger button 31A reaches a predetermined number at different ratios depending on the operation system notice pattern set as the usage pattern. Sometimes, it may be determined whether or not to change the content of the effect in the notice effect, and the changed content of the effect. Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not to change the content of the production at a different rate depending on the progress of the content of the production and the number of times the instruction operation is detected on the trigger button 31A. Alternatively, every time an instruction operation on the trigger button 31A is detected, whether or not to change the content of the production at a different rate depending on the progress of the content of the current production, and the changed content of the production are determined. May be.

  In this way, a “trigger button single-shot” notice effect that is classified into the operation type notice type of the trigger button single-shot CBY3 is executed, or “trigger button repeated hits” classified into the operation type notice type of the trigger button repeated-type CBY4 is executed. Different processing is executed in step S734 depending on whether the notice effect is executed. As a result, even when a single instruction operation on the trigger button 31A is detected during the execution of the notice effect, the process for changing the effect contents in the notice effect of “single trigger button” and “trigger button repeated hit” There is no confusion between the notice effect and the process for changing the contents of the effect.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the special chart waiting process executed in step S173 of FIG. In the special chart waiting process shown in FIG. 51, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the hit start designation command reception waiting time set in step S536 in FIG. 48 has elapsed (step S551). If the hit waiting designation command reception waiting time has elapsed (step S551; Yes), the effect process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to “0” (step S552), and then waiting for a special figure. The process ends.

  If the hit start designation command reception waiting time has not elapsed in step S551 (step S551; No), it is determined whether or not a hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S553). ). At this time, if no hit start designation command is received (step S553; No), the waiting process for the special figure is terminated. On the other hand, when the hit start designation command is received (step S553; Yes), it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is “big hit” (step S554). If the special figure display result is not “big hit” (step S554; No), the special figure display result is “small hit”, so that the value of the production process flag corresponds to the small hit medium production process. After the value is updated to “4” (step S555), the waiting process per special figure is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S554 that the special figure display result is “big hit” (step S554; Yes), the value of the production process flag is updated to “6”, which is a value corresponding to the big hit production processing. (Step S557), the special figure waiting process is terminated.

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of the ending effect process executed in step S177 of FIG. In the ending effect process shown in FIG. 52, the effect control CPU 120 first checks whether or not an ending effect timer is set (step S580). When the ending effect timer is set, the process proceeds to step S595. If the ending effect timer is not set, it is checked whether or not a hit end designation command reception flag indicating that a hit end designation command has been received is set (step S581).

  If the winning end designation command reception flag is set, the winning end designation command reception flag is reset (step S582), and it is determined whether or not the end is a 15 round big hit.

  If it is a big hit of 15 rounds, a value corresponding to the post-release stage time is set in the ending stage timer (step S584), and the stage control pattern CED1-1 is set (step S585).

  On the other hand, if it is not a big hit of 15 rounds (in the case of a sudden hit or a small hit), the process proceeds to step S586, and after setting the value corresponding to the post-release stage time in the ending stage timer, the probability change flag and the short time flag are set. It is determined whether or not the latent probability changing state depends on the situation (step S587).

  If the latent probability variation state is not determined in step S587, an effect control pattern CED2-1 is set.

  If the latent probability changing state is determined in step S587, the process proceeds to step S590 to extract random values SR3 and SR4. Then, by comparing the extracted random number SR3 with the hit end effect determination table 144, the hit effect control pattern CED2-3 including the effect that the shutters 38H and 38L are operated or the effect control in which the shutter of the image is displayed. One of the patterns CED2-2 is determined as an effect control pattern for the ending effect, and the stage (mode) after winning is determined by comparing SR4 with the stage (mode) determination table 145 (step S591). ). Then, the effect control pattern CED2-2 or the effect control pattern CED2-3 determined in step S591 is set as the effect control pattern for the ending effect.

  In step S595, after subtracting 1 from the value of the big hit end effect timer, the process proceeds to step S596, and the same effect control command process as step S538 is performed based on the effect control pattern set in step S585, step S589, and step S592. carry out.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the value of the ending effect timer is 0, that is, whether or not the ending effect time has elapsed (step S597). If not, the process ends. When the ending effect time has elapsed, the effect control CPU 120 clears the effect process flag and initializes the value to “0” (step S598), and then ends the ending effect process.

  Here, specific examples of effects implemented in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment controlled as described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 66, the display screen of the image display device 5 transitions in the order of (A), (B), (C), (D)... From the upper left of the page to the lower right of the page.

  FIG. 62 shows an effect form in the case of super reach after three pseudo-continuations in the display system notice of the present embodiment. First, before the variable display of the decorative design, as shown in FIG. 62A, in the first reserved memory number display area 5D, the direction to the first reserved memory number display area 5D that is the next variable display target. The hold storage display displayed on the far left is a display mode of stars indicating that there is a possibility of a super reach or a big hit.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 62 (B), the reserved storage display in the display mode of the stars to be subjected to the current variable display is consumed (erased), the number of the stored storage display is reduced, and the variable display is started. The It should be noted that, by erasing these reserved storage displays, the reserved storage display displayed on the right side of the star display mode is sequentially shifted leftward as shown in FIG. 62 (B).

  When the decorative display variable display is started, for example, a variable display character or the like may be displayed to notify the possibility of becoming a pseudo-ream.

  As shown in FIG. 62 (C), for example, “5”, which is the left symbol of the pseudo consecutive chance determined from the pseudo consecutive chances in FIG. 4 (A), is displayed in the left display area 5L. For example, if “6” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right display area 5R, it becomes a temporary stop symbol of “5”, “5”, and “6”, which is one of the chances, and becomes a pseudo-ream. After giving the player a sense of expectation, as shown in FIG. 62 (D), for example, “5” as a medium symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle display area 5C. “5” and “6” are temporarily displayed.

  When the first variable display is started again after the temporary stop, the lower shutter 38L is moved upward so as to cover the display area of the lower half of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. After moving, it operates to return to a predetermined storage position. When the shutter 38L operates, as shown in FIG. 23, a high-reliability notice effect pattern is determined. When a low-reliability notice effect pattern is determined, an image is displayed. The device 5 displays an image of a shutter that operates (moves) upward so as to cover the display area of the lower half.

  When the lower shutter 38L operates in this way, as shown in FIG. 62E, the image display device displays the temporary stop symbols “5”, “5”, and “6” that are chances. The display of the stored memory displayed in the display area 5 (the first stored memory number display area 5D) becomes invisible to the player by the operation of the lower shutter 38L, and the player can determine how many the stored memory number is. It cannot be recognized. Therefore, the positions of the first reserved memory number display area 5D and the second reserved memory number display area 5U are changed to positions that are not hidden by the shutters 38H and 38L (positions that do not overlap with the movable ranges of the shutters 38H and 38L). In this embodiment, the position of the first reserved storage number display area 5D provided in the display area below the image display device 5 is changed to the display area on the left side of the image display device 5, and The position of the second reserved storage number display area 5U provided in the display area is changed to the display area on the right side of the image display device 5.

  In this embodiment, not only the position of the first reserved storage number display area 5D but also the second display area provided in the display area above the image display device 5 that is not hidden by the lower shutter 38L. The position of the reserved storage number display area 5U is also changed. This is to prevent the reserved memory display in the second reserved memory number display area 5U from being mistaken for the reserved memory display in the first reserved memory number display area 5D hidden by the lower shutter 38L. is there. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when only the lower shutter 38L is operated, only the position of the first reserved storage number display area 5D hidden by the lower shutter 38L is changed. You may do it. In this case, changing only the position of the first reserved storage number display area 5D can be a warning that the lower shutter 38L operates.

  In the period when the positions of the first reserved memory number display area 5D and the second reserved memory number display area 5U are changed, there is a start prize at the first start prize opening or the second start prize opening, and the reserved memory number. When the number increases, different sounds corresponding to the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

  Then, after the start of re-variation, as shown in FIG. 62 (F), after the temporary stop symbols such as “5”, “5” and “6” which are chances are displayed, the second re-variation Is started.

  When the second re-variation is started, the upper shutter 38H is moved downward so as to temporarily cover the upper half display area of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. Then, it operates to return to a predetermined storage position. In the operation of the upper shutter 38H, the position of the second reserved memory number display area 5U hidden by the operating upper shutter 38H is already in accordance with the first operation of the lower shutter 38L. Since it has already been changed together with the position of the number display area 5D, control for changing the position of the reserved storage number display area is not performed again.

  After the start of the second re-variation, as shown in FIG. 62 (H), after the temporary stop symbols such as “5”, “5”, and “6” that are chances are displayed, the third time Re-variation begins.

  When the third re-variation is started, as shown in FIG. 62 (I), the upper shutter 38H and the lower shutter 38L operate together, and the upper and lower sides of the display area of the image display device 5 are operated. Operates (moves) to temporarily cover the side. In the operation of both the shutters 38H and 38L, the position of the first reserved storage number display area 5D hidden by both the shutters 38H and 38L and the second are already associated with the first operation of the lower shutter 38L. Since both the positions of the reserved memory number display area 5U have already been changed, the control for changing the position of the reserved memory number display area is not performed again. That is, it is possible to reduce the control load when the shutters 38H and 38L are repeatedly operated intermittently in association with re-variation of these pseudo-reams, step-up notice of step-up notice, or the like.

  Then, after the start of the third re-variation, as shown in FIG. 62 (J), for example, “5” which is the same decorative design is displayed in the left display area 5L and the right display area 5R. After reach is established and a predetermined reach effect is performed, as shown in FIG. 62 (K), an effect other than “5” is displayed in the middle display area 5C, resulting in reach lost. Is implemented.

  Thereafter, in the display area of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 62L, for example, a message such as “continuous hit!” Is displayed together with the image of the push button 31B, and the player operates the push button 31B. By satisfying a predetermined condition (for example, the number of operations within a predetermined time is equal to or greater than a predetermined number), the development of the super reach shown in FIG. 62 (L) to FIG. Then, the decorative pattern change display ends without developing into a super-reaching effect (FIG. 62 (R)). Note that, in the event that the game is finally a big hit, it will develop into a super reach effect regardless of whether or not the player's operation satisfies a predetermined condition.

  In the super reach effect, as shown in FIG. 62 (M), when the player's operation satisfies a predetermined condition, etc., the upper shutter 38H and the lower The shutter 38L operates together to operate (move) so as to temporarily cover the upper and lower sides of the display area of the image display device 5, and after the part of the display area is once hidden, both shutters 38H , 38L returns to the initial storage position and the display area is released, a message “battle!” Is displayed and, for example, the stick controller 30 is used as shown in FIG. Then, a battle effect such as knocking down an enemy fighter displayed on the image display device 5 is performed.

  Then, in the event of a big hit, as shown in FIG. 62 (P), after winning the battle, the display of “Victory!” Is displayed as shown in FIG. 62 (O). In the case where, for example, “5”, “5”, “5” are derived and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and finally deviated, As a result of defeating the battle, as shown in FIG. 62 (Q), after the display of “defeat!” Is displayed, a decorative pattern that is out of reach as shown in FIG. 62 (R), for example, “ “5”, “6”, and “5” are derived and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. As shown in FIGS. 62 (P) and (R), when the variation of the decorative design is finished, the display positions of the first reserved memory number display area 5D and the second reserved memory number display area 5U are the original positions ( The display area is returned to the upper and lower display areas of the image display device 5.

  FIG. 57 is a diagram showing the relationship between the operations of the shutters 38H and 38L and the hold storage display in three pseudo-series in the display system notice. As shown in FIG. 57, the decorative symbol starts variable display (variable display) in conjunction with the special symbol variable display.

  When a highly reliable notice pattern is determined as the notice pattern of the notice effect, as shown in FIG. 57 (A), the upper shutter 38H is operated at the first re-variation of the decorative pattern in the pseudo-ream, The lower shutter 38L is operated during the second re-variation, and both shutters 38H and 38L are operated during the third re-variation. When the upper shutter 38H is operated during the first re-variation, that is, when the upper shutter 38H, which is a movable object, is operated during the notice effect performed before reach is established, the first The display positions of the reserved memory number display area 5D and the second reserved memory number display area 5U are changed.

  On the other hand, when the low-reliability notice pattern is determined as the notice pattern of the notice effect, as shown in FIG. 57 (B), the moving image of the upper shutter is displayed at the first re-variation of the decorative pattern in the pseudo-ream. Is displayed, the moving image of the lower shutter is displayed at the second re-variation, the moving image of the upper shutter and the lower shutter is displayed at the third re-variation, and the actual shutters 38H and 38L are not operated. . Then, when the moving image of the upper shutter is displayed at the time of the first re-variation, that is, when the moving image of the upper shutter, which is the effect image, is displayed during the notice effect performed before the reach is established. In addition, the display positions of the first reserved memory number display area 5D and the second reserved memory number display area 5U are changed.

  FIG. 58 is a diagram showing the relationship between the operation of the shutters 38H and 38L and the hold storage display in the step-up effect performed in the notice effect period before the reach is established as in the above-described three pseudo-reams.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58, when the step-up notice effect is performed, the shutters 38H and 38L operate at each change (step-up) of the notice effect. Specifically, at the time of the change from the first step to the second step (step-up), the lower shutter 38L has moved upward so as to temporarily cover the lower half display area of the image display device 5. Thereafter, it operates so as to return to the predetermined storage position, and at the time of the change from the second step to the third step (step up), the upper shutter 38H temporarily covers the display area of the upper half of the image display device 5. The shutters 38H and 38L are part of the image display device 5 during the change from the third step to the fourth step (step-up). The display area is moved to temporarily cover the display area, and then moved back to a predetermined storage position.

  In these step-up notice effects, the first reserved memory number display area 5D is displayed when the lower shutter 38L is operated from the first step to the second step (step-up) before reach is established. In addition, the display position of the second reserved storage number display area 5U is changed together.

  In addition, after the display positions of the first reserved memory number display area 5D and the second reserved memory number display area 5U are changed, that is, after the decorative pattern changes from the first step to the second step, the reserved memory is stored. When the number increases, as shown in FIG. 58, a notification sound (increase notification sound) indicating an increase in the number of reserved memories may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

  As described above, the increase notification sound is output during the period in which the display position of the reserved memory number display area is changed, so that the number of reserved memories increases after the display position of the reserved memory number display area is changed. The player can be surely recognized.

  FIG. 63 shows an effect form when super reach is reached after three pseudo-continuations in the operation system notice. First, before variable display of decorative symbols, as shown in FIG. 63 (A), in the first reserved memory number display area 5D, the direction to the first reserved memory number display area 5D that is the next variable display target. The hold storage display displayed on the far left is a display mode of stars indicating that there is a possibility of a super reach or a big hit.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 63 (B), the reserved storage display in the display mode of the stars to be subjected to the current variable display is consumed (erased), the number of the stored storage display is reduced, and variable display is started. The It should be noted that, by erasing these reserved storage displays, the reserved storage display displayed on the right side of the star display mode is sequentially shifted leftward as shown in FIG. 62 (B).

  When the decorative display variable display is started, as shown in FIGS. 63C and 63D, the image of the stick controller 30 on which the trigger button 31A is operated in the display area of the image display device 5 is displayed. And the image of the push button 31B for which the push button 31B is an operation target are displayed side by side, and each image is alternately and repeatedly inverted to display a lottery effect display indicating which one is selected. Is done. In this embodiment, as described above, when the trigger button 31A is selected rather than the push button 31B, the player is more reliable to make a big hit. Since the lottery effect display is watched with the expectation that the button 31A will be selected, the player's attention to the effect display can be improved.

  Then, for example, after the push button 31B is highlighted in the lottery effect display, the repeated highlight display ends, and the push button 31B is determined as the operation target. Then, as shown in FIG. The image of 31B and a message such as “continuous hit!” Are displayed, and the operation of the push button 31B is validated.

  At this time, the hold display position change flag is set by the effect control CPU 120 based on the hold display position change flag control data included in the process data when the operation of the push button 31B is validated. As the operation of the button 31B is validated, the display positions of the first reserved memory number display area 5D and the second reserved memory number display area 5U are both changed.

  Thereafter, in the display area of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 63E, for example, a message such as “continuous hit!” Is displayed together with the image of the push button 31B, and the player operates the push button 31B. When a predetermined condition (for example, the number of operations satisfies a predetermined number (such as 1 or 10 times)), the upper shutter 38H and the lower shutter 38L operate together as shown in FIG. After the display area is temporarily hidden by operating (moving) so as to temporarily cover a part of the display area of the display device 5, both the shutters 38H and 38L return to the initial storage position and the display area is changed. When opened, a decorative pattern of “5” is displayed in the left display area 5L, which is a “chance”, for example, “5”, “5”, “6” may be displayed. "6" decoration in display area 5R Pattern and is displayed, the image appears demonstration is performed center display area 5C is in variation.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the screens shown in FIGS. 63C and 63D are provided as effects that suggest the possibility of performing effects in which the shutters 38H and 38L are operated by the player's operation. 63E is displayed on the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an effect that the shutters 38H and 38L are operated can be executed. For example, instead of displaying the screens shown in FIGS. 63C and 63D and the screen shown in FIG. 63E on the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R receive “ An effect such as outputting a message such as “continuous hit!” By voice or an effect such as flashing the push button 31B may be performed. In this case, the voice output or the flashing effect starts. With the first hold憶数 display area 5D and may be both change the display position of pending storage display of the second pending memory number display area 5U.

  When the player does not satisfy the predetermined condition by the operation of the push button 31B, for example, when the operation by the push button 31B is not performed at all, the closing operation effect of the shutters 38H and 38L shown in FIG. The pseudo-rendition effects shown in FIGS. 63 (H) to 63 (L) are not performed, and the process proceeds to reach establishment shown in FIG. 63 (M). That is, there is a case where the shutters 38H and 38L do not operate in accordance with the player's operation.

  As described above, when the shutters 38H and 38L are operated in accordance with the operation by the player and the on-hold storage display in the first on-hold storage number display area 5D and the second on-hold storage number display area 5U is hidden, the game is performed in advance. By changing the position of the reserved memory number display area in advance at the time when the user's operation becomes valid, while detecting the presence or absence of these operations, the control of operating the shutters 38H and 38L according to the operation and the display of the reserved memory number It can be avoided that the processing load of the effect control CPU 120 such as the control for changing the position of the area becomes extremely large temporarily, and the stable operation of the effect control CPU 120 can be secured.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 63 (G), for example, “5”, which is a middle symbol, is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle display area 5C, so that chance chances “5”, “5”, and “6” are temporarily stopped. After the display, as shown in FIGS. 63 (H) to 63 (L), the lower shutter 38L is displayed in the first re-variation of the decorative pattern, as in the case of the three pseudo-continuations in FIG. 62 described above. Operates (moves) upward so as to temporarily cover the lower half display area of the image display device 5, and the upper shutter 38H temporarily moves the upper half display area of the image display device 5 in the second re-variation. The upper shutter 38H and the lower shutter 38L are operated together in the third re-variation so as to temporarily cover a part of the display area of the image display device 5. The reach shown in FIG. 63 (M). To migrate to stand. Note that the flow after the establishment of reach (development effects such as reach loss and super reach) is the same as that in the case of the three pseudo-continuations in FIG. 62 described above, and the description thereof is omitted here.

  FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation of the shutters 38H and 38L and the hold storage display in these operation system notices. As shown in FIG. 59, the decorative symbol starts variable display (variable display) in conjunction with the special symbol variable display.

  When a highly reliable notice pattern is determined as the notice pattern of the notice effect, as shown in FIG. 59 (A), a trigger button for accepting an operation from the player performed before the start of the pseudo-ream When the operation of 31A or push button 31B is validated, the display positions of the first reserved memory number display area 5D and the second reserved memory number display area 5U are changed.

  On the other hand, when the low-reliability notice pattern is determined as the notice pattern of the notice effect, as shown in FIG. 59 (B), the trigger is used to accept the operation from the player as with the high-reliability notice pattern. The operation of the button 31A or the push button 31B is enabled before the start of the pseudo-ream. In the pseudo-ream, the moving image of the upper shutter is displayed at the first re-variation of the decorative pattern, and the second re-variation is performed. The moving image of the lower shutter is displayed at, the moving images of the upper shutter and the lower shutter are displayed at the third re-variation, and the actual shutters 38H and 38L are not operated. Similarly to FIG. 59A, when the operation of the trigger button 31A or the push button 31B is validated in order to accept the operation from the player performed before the start of the pseudo-ream, the first hold memory The display positions of the number display area 5D and the second reserved storage number display area 5U are changed.

  FIG. 64 shows an effect form of normal reach in the present embodiment. As these normal reach, as shown in FIG. 64, when reach is established, the shutters 38H and 38L do not operate and the shutter image is displayed. 22) and normal reach 2 (normal PA2-2 (displacement), normal PA4-2 (win)) that operates so that the shutters 38H and 38L temporarily cover a part of the display area of the image display device 5 when reach is established. 22).

  In any normal reach, when the reach is established, the display positions of the first reserved memory number display area 5D and the second reserved memory number display area 5U are changed.

  That is, as in the case of normal reach 2, not only when the shutters 38H and 38L are operated when the reach is established, but also in the normal reach 1 where the shutters according to the images are displayed and the shutters 38H and 38L are not operated, the position of the reserved memory number display area is changed. It has changed.

  In the above description, the normal reach has been described as an example. However, when the effect of operating the shutters 38H and 38L and the effect of displaying the shutter of the image are performed separately (high reliability and low reliability of the notice effect and the ending effect). Similarly, in the case of reliability, the position of the reserved storage number display area may be changed regardless of the operation or non-operation of the shutters 38H and 38L.

  FIG. 60 is a diagram showing the relationship between the operations of the shutters 38H and 38L and the display / non-display of the hold storage display in these normal reach. When normal reach 2 is determined as the variation pattern, as shown in FIG. 60B, both shutters 38H and 38L are operated when reach is established. When both the shutters 38H and 38L are operated, that is, when reach is established in which both the shutters 38H and 38L which are movable objects are operated, the first reserved memory number display area 5D and the second reserved memory number display are displayed. The display position of area 5U is changed.

  On the other hand, when the normal reach 1 is determined as the variation pattern, as shown in FIG. 60A, when the reach is established, the moving images of the upper shutter and the lower shutter are displayed, and the actual shutters 38H and 38L are Although not operated, like the normal reach 2, when the reach is established, the display positions of the first reserved memory number display area 5D and the second reserved memory number display area 5U are changed.

  Even when the normal reach is performed, if the shutters 38H and 38L are operated in the notice effect, or if the operation of the trigger button 31A or the push button 31B is validated, before the reach is established, The display positions of the first reserved memory number display area 5D and the second reserved memory number display area 5U may be changed.

  FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an effect form of super reach β in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 22, the super reach β without pseudo-ream is a variation pattern in which the shutters 38H and 38L are not operated when the reach is established, as shown in FIG. If not selected, the positions of the first reserved memory number display area 5D and the second reserved memory number display area 5U may not be changed even after reach is established.

  That is, as shown in FIGS. 65 (A) to 65 (D), the reach is established after the decorative symbol variable display is started (FIG. 65 (C)), and the established reach is lost. Even at the time (FIG. 65 (D)), there is a case where the position of the reserved storage number display area is not changed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 65 (D), after the established reach is lost, the display area of the image display device 5 includes, for example, an image of the push button 31B, as shown in FIG. 65 (E). A message such as “continuous hit!” Is displayed, and the operation of the push button 31B is validated by the player, so that the position of the reserved memory number display area is changed. When the operation by the push button 31B satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, the number of operations is a predetermined number (such as 1 or 10 times)), SPB3-2P is determined as the symbol variation control pattern. As shown in FIG. 65 (J), both the upper shutter 38H and the lower shutter 38L operate (move) so as to temporarily cover a part of the display area of the image display device 5, and the display area is temporarily hidden. After that, when both the shutters 38H and 38L are returned to the initial storage position and the display area is released, a message “battle!” Is displayed, as shown in FIG. For example, a battle effect such as the characters A to D knocking down an enemy fighter displayed on the image display device 5 according to the operation of the stick controller 30 is performed.

  On the other hand, when SPB3-2N is determined as the symbol variation control pattern, as shown in FIG. 65 (F), the operation by the push button 31B is performed under a predetermined condition (for example, the number of operations is a predetermined number (one time or 10 And the like, the shutter image is moved and displayed so as to cover a part of the display area of the image display device 5, and the shutter image is moved and displayed in the vertical direction. After the message “battle!” Is displayed, as shown in FIG. 65G, for example, the characters A and B are displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the operation of the stick controller 30. Combat effects such as knocking down fighter planes are implemented.

  Then, in the event of a big hit, as shown in FIG. 65 (I) after winning the battle, the display of “Victory!” Is displayed as shown in FIG. 65 (H). In the case where, for example, “5”, “5”, “5” are derived and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and finally deviated, As a result of defeating the battle, as shown in FIG. 65 (L), after the display of “defeat!” Is displayed, a decorative pattern that is out of reach as shown in FIG. 65 (M), for example, “ “5”, “6”, and “5” are derived and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

  In these super reach β, as shown in FIG. 65D, after the established reach is lost, the operation of the push button 31B is validated, and the shutter 38H, When 38L operates, the display positions of the first reserved memory number display area 5D and the second reserved memory number display area 5U are changed.

  In this embodiment, the push button 31B operation effects are implemented at the time of development to super reach due to reach loss, and the first reserved memory number display area 5D is accompanied by the operation of the push button 31B accompanying these operation effects. In addition, although the example of changing the display position of the second reserved memory number display area 5U has been shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation effect of the push button 31B is implemented at the time of development to these super reach. In this case, when the shutters 38H and 38L are operated, the first reserved memory number may be used. The display position of the display area 5D and the second reserved storage number display area 5U may be changed.

  FIG. 61 is a diagram showing the relationship between the operation of the shutters 38H and 38L and the hold storage display in super reach without pseudo-ream.

  When the super reach α is determined as the variation pattern, the shutters 38H and 38L are operated when the reach is established, as in the normal reach 2, as shown in FIG. That is, when the super reach α is determined, the player cannot recognize whether the reach is the normal reach 2 or the super reach α until the reach is lost and the super reach is developed. When both the shutters 38H and 38L are operated, that is, when reach is established in which both the shutters 38H and 38L which are movable objects are operated, the first reserved memory number display area 5D and the second reserved memory number display are displayed. The display position of area 5U is changed.

  On the other hand, when the super reach β is determined as the variation pattern, and the SPB 3-2N or SPB 5-2N is determined as the symbol variation control pattern, unlike the super reach α, as shown in FIG. When the reach is established, the shutters 38H and 38L are not operated, and, as shown in FIG. 65, the moving images of the upper shutter and the lower shutter are displayed even in the development to the super reach after the reach failure. The shutters 38H and 38L are not operated. However, at the time of development to super reach after these reach deviations, for example, as the operation of the trigger button 31A and the push button 31B is validated, the first reserved memory number display area 5D and the second reserved memory are used. The display position of the number display area 5U is changed.

  In addition, when the super reach β is determined as the variation pattern and the SPB 3-2P or SPB 5-2P is determined as the symbol variation control pattern, unlike the super reach α, as shown in FIG. 61 (C). When the reach is established, the shutters 38H and 38L are not operated. However, as shown in FIG. 65, both shutters 38H and 38L are operated at the time of development to the super reach after the reach is lost. Then, when both shutters 38H and 38L are operated at the time of development to the super reach after the detachment, that is, when both the shutters 38H and 38L are operated after the detachment, the first reserved storage number display area 5D. In addition, the display position of the second reserved storage number display area 5U is changed.

  Note that after the reach is lost, a big hit or the like occurs due to the special game in which the reach has been lost, and the period of the ending effect at the end of the hit is also included.

  In the above-described embodiment, when the display positions of the first reserved memory number display area 5D and the second reserved memory number display area 5U are changed after the decorative symbol variation is started, the decorative symbol variation is completed. The display position is not returned to the original position but is continuously displayed at the changed position. However, the changed display positions of the first reserved memory number display area 5D and the second reserved memory number display area 5U are obstructive when displaying an effect image (for example, a character image) used for a notice effect or a reach effect. There is a risk of becoming. Further, if the display positions of the first reserved memory number display area 5D and the second reserved memory number display area 5U are changed and are not returned to the original positions, the shutters 38H and 38L are closed thereafter (or the movement of the shutters). In contrast to this, it is possible to predict that the effect of closing the shutters 38H and 38L will be performed, and the effect that the image is displayed may be performed. There is a risk of reducing the unexpectedness of.

  Therefore, when an effect of closing the shutters 38H and 38L is executed, the display position of the first reserved memory number display area 5D and the second reserved memory number display area 5U is changed, and the shutters 38H and 38L are closed. When the above is completed, the display positions of the first reserved memory number display area 5D and the second reserved memory number display area 5U may be returned to the original positions. That is, the display positions of the first reserved memory number display area 5D and the second reserved memory number display area 5U may be changed only during the period in which the shutters 38H and 38L (or the shutter moving images) are operating. .

  FIG. 66 shows the reach when the display positions of the first reserved memory number display area 5D and the second reserved memory number display area 5U are changed only during the period when the shutters 38H and 38L (or the moving images of the shutter) are operating. It is a figure which shows the modification of the display operation | movement in an image display apparatus when is performed. As in the case shown in FIG. 64, when the reach is established, the display positions of the first reserved memory number display area 5D and the second reserved memory number display area 5U are below and above the display area in the image display device 5. The position is changed to the left and right positions of the display area. Then, the moving image of the shutter or the shutters 38H and 38L operates to cover a part of the display area of the image display device 5, and then the moving image of the shutter or the shutters 38H and 38L returns to the initial position. At this time, the display positions of the first reserved memory number display area 5D and the second reserved memory number display area 5U (the reserved memory number display area) are returned to the original positions (below and above the display area). Thereafter, when the moving image of the shutter or the shutters 38H and 38L is operated again during the execution of the reach effect, the first reserved memory number display area 5D and the second reserved memory number display area 5U (hold memory number display area) are displayed. Change the position again.

  In this way, the display positions of the first reserved memory number display area 5D and the second reserved memory number display area 5U are changed only during the period in which the shutters 38H and 38L (or the moving images of the shutter) are operating. By doing so, the first reserved memory number display area 5D and the second reserved memory number display area 5U become an obstacle when displaying an effect image (for example, an image of a character) used for a notice effect or a reach effect. In addition, it is possible to improve the unexpectedness of the effect by making it difficult to predict that the effect of closing the shutters 38H and 38L will be executed. In the example shown in FIG. 66, the display positions of the first reserved memory number display area 5D and the second reserved memory number display area 5U are displayed when an effect of closing the shutters 38H and 38L when the reach is established is executed. The display position of the first reserved memory number display area 5D and the second reserved memory number display area 5U is also changed when the control to be changed is executed and the effect of closing the shutters 38H and 38L during the reach effect is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, when the operations of the shutters 38H and 38L at the time of the first re-variation are completed, the display positions of the first reserved memory number display area 5D and the second reserved memory number display area 5U are returned to the original positions again. In addition, when the shutters 38H and 38L are operated at the second re-variation, the display positions of the first reserved memory number display area 5D and the second reserved memory number display area 5U may be changed again.

  Next, in this embodiment, characteristic points regarding the variation pattern for deviation determined in the case of deviation will be described below. For example, in the normal state, the gaming control microcomputer 100 determines the variation pattern by determining the variation pattern type using the loss variation pattern type determination table shown in FIG. In this case, the outlier variation pattern type determination table has a common determination value (230 to 251) for CA2-3, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach, regardless of the total number of pending storage. Assigned. Also, in the deviation variation pattern type determination table, different determination values are assigned to variation pattern types including variation patterns (normal reach and non-reach) other than super reach according to the total number of pending storage. Therefore, by assigning the ratio of the determination value to the variation pattern type including the variation pattern having a short variable display time as the total number of pending storage increases, the operating rate of the variable display decreases. It can be prevented as much as possible.

  FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram of the determination value assignment state in the deviation variation pattern type determination table. In this embodiment, when the total number of reserved memories is 2 to 4, the random number MR3 corresponding to the special figure reserved memory number “2 to 4” in the loss variation pattern type determination table shown in FIG. Is used, and the total number of reserved memory is 5 or more, the random number value corresponding to the special figure reserved memory number “5 to 8” in the loss variation pattern type determination table shown in FIG. The decision value for MR3 is used.

  As shown in FIG. 67, when the total pending storage number is “2 to 4”, compared to the case where the total pending storage number is 0 to 2, slips and pseudo-continuations that have a relatively long variation time. The percentage of normal reach is small. In addition, when the combined pending storage number is 0 to 2, the variation pattern type of CA1-1 not including the shortened non-reach variation pattern is set as the non-reach variation pattern type. On the other hand, when the total number of pending storages is “2-4”, instead of the CA1-1 fluctuation pattern type, the CA1-2 fluctuation pattern type including the short non-reach fluctuation pattern is set. Since a large number of determination values of the random value MR3 are assigned to the variation pattern types of CA1-2 including these shortened non-reach shift variation patterns, CA1 including these shortened non-reach shift variation patterns. -2 variation pattern types can be selected, so that the variable display function can be reduced by shortening the average variation time as the total number of pending storage increases. The rate can be prevented as much as possible the situation in which lowered.

  Similarly, when the total pending storage number is 5 or more, compared to the case where the total pending storage number is 2 to 4, the rate of slippage, pseudo-continuity, and normal reach is further reduced. When the total number of pending storages is 5 or more, instead of the variation pattern type of CA1-2 including the variation pattern of shortened non-reach in the case of “2-4”, the variation time is further changed. CA1-3 variation pattern types including short shortening non-reach deviation variation patterns are set, and more random number values MR3 are set for CA1-3 variation pattern types including short non-reach variation patterns. By assigning the judgment value, many CA1-3 fluctuation pattern types including these shortened non-reach fluctuation patterns can be selected, so that the average fluctuation time increases as the total number of pending storage increases. By shortening, it is possible to further prevent a situation in which the operation rate of variable display is lowered.

  In the above embodiment, when the number of reserved memories is large, the ratio of moving (operating) the movable object (shutter 38H, 38L) is lowered, and when the number of reserved memories is small, the ratio of moving the movable object May be configured to be high. This is because when the number of reserved memories is large, the number of reserved memory displays is large, and therefore the possibility that the reserved memory display is hidden by a movable object increases.

  In the above embodiment, the first reserved memory number display area 5D is provided corresponding to the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol, and the second reserved memory number is displayed corresponding to the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol. Although the area 5U was provided, the total reserved memory number (also referred to as the total reserved memory number), which is the total reserved memory number of the reserved memory number of the first special symbol and the reserved memory number of the second special symbol, is displayed. A total reserved memory number display area may be provided in the display area of the image display device 5. In this case, when the total reserved memory number display area is hidden when the movable object (shutters 38H and 38L) is moved (operated), the first reserved memory number display corresponding to the reserved memory number of the first special symbol is displayed. You may make it divide | segment into the 2nd reserved memory number display area 5U corresponding to the reserved memory number of the area 5D and the 2nd special symbol, and display a reserved memory number separately.

  In addition, when the display positions of the first reserved memory number display area 5D and the second reserved memory number display area 5U are changed, the first after the change of the display position is performed so as not to interfere with the variable display of the decorative design and the effect image. The display areas of the reserved memory number display area 5D and the second reserved memory number display area 5U are preferably small display areas. In addition, the hold memory display displayed in the first hold memory number display area 5D and the second hold memory number display area 5U after the change of the display position is thin so as not to interfere with the variable display of the decorative design and the effect image. Color display or translucent display may be used. In such a case, a star or rhombus hold memory display is performed as a prefetch notice by the hold memory display, but the hold memory display of the prefetch notice may be difficult to see. In view of this, the hold storage display of the pre-reading notice may be a simple display (for example, a hold storage display having a different color or a simple hold storage display such as a square or a triangle).

  Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and modifications and additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. It is.

  For example, the embodiment can be applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, and is particularly advantageous for the player when the display result of the identification information in the variable display device becomes a predetermined specific display result. The present invention is suitably applied to a gaming machine that controls to an advantageous state.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8a 1st special symbol display device 8b 2nd special symbol display device 9 Production display device 13 First start winning port 14 Second starting winning port 20 Special variable winning ball device 31 Game control board (main board)
50 operation unit 56 CPU
560 Game Control Microcomputer 80 Production Control Board 100 Production Control Microcomputer 101 Production Control CPU
109 VDP

Claims (1)

Based on the establishment of the start condition, it is provided with variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can each be identified, and the result of the game is determined by deriving the display result to the variable display means. A gaming machine that shifts to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player when the result is a specific gaming result,
On-hold storage means for storing a right to perform variable display of the identification information based on establishment of the start condition, up to a predetermined upper limit number;
And predetermined to hold display area, hold display control means for identifiable displays the number of rights to the pending identification information stored in the hold memory means in the variable display means,
Until the variable display of the display results of the identification information based on the first rights stored in the hold memory means is derived, and pre-determining means for determining a result of the game whether or not said specific game result ,
Said predetermined movable product to be movable in a superimposed position that overlaps at least a portion of the predetermined hold display area in the non-overlapping position said variable display means from which is not superimposed on the hold display area in said variable display means,
Based on the determination result of the pre-determining means, a movable effect determining means for determining whether or not to execute a movable effect for moving the movable object from the non-superimposed position to the superimposed position;
Based on the determination result of the movable effect determining means, the movable suggestion effect executing means for executing the movable suggestion effect suggesting the possibility of executing the movable effect;
When the movable effect determining means determines to execute the movable effect, the movable effect executing means for executing the movable effect after the movable suggestion effect is executed ;
With
The hold display control means includes
When the movable effect execution means executes the movable effect , the movable effect is executed regardless of whether or not the hold specific information is displayed in an area where the movable object overlaps in the predetermined hold display area. Before the predetermined hold display area is changed to a position that does not overlap with the movable object at the overlapping position,
Either when the movable suggestion effect executing means executes the movable suggestion effect and the movable effect execution means executes the movable effect, or when the movable suggestion effect is executed and the movable effect is not executed. The gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined hold display area is changed to a position that does not overlap with the movable object at the overlapping position from when the movable suggestion effect is executed .

Images